Home

Confidential

1. API Compoatibilit OS Driver Tool Utility IR 310 IR 320 Change y Remarks All BIOS APM APM ACPI Changed power management Keyboard firmware EPSO EPSO No Yes related tools for DOS changed Keyboard firmware EPSO EPSO No Yes related tools for changed Windows Layer compatible 28 EPSO EPSO No Yes keyboard unit related changed tools DOS CDROM Driver EPSO EPSO No Yes changed Network Driver Realtek Intel Changed Yes Touch Panel Driver Fujitsu Fujitsu Not Yes changed Win98SE Chipset Driver Intel New Yes Power Switch Disable EPSON New Yes Supported by BIOS tool IR 310 AC Line watching tool EPSON New Yes Supported by BIOS and Windows API IR 310 Logon tool EPSON EPSON Not Yes changed NVRAM utility EPSON Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Network Driver Realtek Intel Changed Yes Sound Driver Ess Analog Changed Yes Devices Touch Panel Driver EPSON EPSON Changed Yes Frequency of the beep sound is changed Fujitsu Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Video Driver Chips Intel Changed Yes B 6 The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual API Compoatibilit OS Driver Tool Utility IR 310 IR 320 Change y Remarks Win NT Logon tool EPSON EPSON Not Yes changed NVRAM utility EPSON Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 APM Driver EPSON EPSON Not Yes
2. TM power supply CC TU ES E 2 54 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual ZN CAUTION When a dedicated printer unit and the TM printer are connected together do not tap power from the TM power connector This connector does not have sufficient power for two printers Use an appropriate power supply for example the PS 170 available for the TM printer The following TM printers can take power from the IR 320 1 TM T85 88 series _1 TM U200 series 1 TM 6000H series For information on how to set up the TM printer see the user s guide for that printer Operation progress 1 Attach the printer tray to the IR 320 2 Install the TM printer on the IR 320 3 Confirm the operation of the TM printer 4 The TM printer can be used Refer to the User s Guide of each printer for the instalation and the operation confirmation procedure of the TM printer Installing a Dedicated TM Printer Unit The following dedicated TM Printer units are available Model Name Specification TM T88IIR Thermal printer 58 mm 80 mm 2 3 3 2 TM U210AR Serial impact dot matrix printer two color TM H3000R Thermal receipt with slip printer TM T88lIR TM U210AR TM H3000R The serial port for the dedicated TM Printer unit is assigned to COM3 by default Rev C Setup 2 55 Confidential Operation progress 1 Install the dedicated printer un
3. 1 68 WU ZZZ ae 4 The dimensions in indicate the dimensions of the DP 504 with the extension prop Peripheral Dimensions of the Printer Tray Dimensions when the OI R101 001 is mounted 0 4 WW 8Z 263 mm 10 4 1 20 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Dimensions when the dedicated printer TM H6000 is attached to the OI R01 022 4 S y 1 UW 89 1 Ly LI 40 mm 1 6 Dimensions When the Printer Unit is Mounted 0 LHW 9TAIISSL WL ul LLFWWEST AVOLZA WL u6 Z L UW ZZE AOOOEH WIL Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 21 1 22 IR 320 System Overview Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Chapter 2 Setup This chapter explains how to set up options and peripheral units of the IR 320 Overview of the setup The peripherals of the IR 320 include the ones that are set by a driver or a utility at the time of setup and must confirm in the operation Peripherals may not operate correctly if the installation order of OS and driver is not correct The basic flow of the setup is described below Printer Customer display 28 84 Keyboard MSR KeyLock Cash drawer l Installing OS l Installing OS L gt y e e e a al Installing the dedicated Installing the 28 84 Key
4. Busy The customer display is busy Probable causes are the following The customer display is executing the self test After startup of the device self diagnostic utility the Customer display has been powered off Ready The DM display is ready to receive data The DM display test is possible COM port information The area of the screen for COM ports lists the DTR DSR RTS CTS DCD and RI status for each available COM port When the port is disabled a message to that effect is shown LPT port information The LPT1 area of the screen lists the BSY ACK PE SLCT and ERR status for the LPT1 port When the port is disabled a message to that effect is shown 6 6 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Messages The message portion of the screen displays the result of tests Table 6 6 Message area Test category Message Description TM printer Disabled This port is disabled Done The TM printer test is completed Check the printing motion and autocutter motion DM display Disabled This port is disabled Done The DM display test is completed Check display Drawer kick out Disabled This port is disabled Done The drawer kick out test is completed Check the motion of cash drawer Loop back Error The diagnostics test failed This message also appears when a loop back connector is not connected or the wrong loop back connector is connected Disabled Th
5. 5 After the extraction the Termination dialog box is displayed Click OK to close the Termination dialog box 6 The following Setup screen is displayed 2 APM 2 0 for NT Setup 7 Confirm the directory into which the driver should be installed and click Setup To change the directory click Change Directory and specify the destination of the installation directory 8 When Setup is clicked installation of the driver starts 9 After completion of the setup the following screen is displayed Click OK APM 2 0 for NT Setup 4 72 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 10 The screen prompts you to reboot Click Restart Now and reboot the OS The driver becomes available after rebooting Reboot Now Confirmation After rebooting the OS check whether the driver has been installed properly by using the following procedure 1 Confirm that the power plug icon is displayed on the task bar Rev C Utilities 4 73 Notes for Use 1 When the power plug icon on the task bar or APM2 0 for NT on the control panel is double clicked the following setting screen is displayed Click OK without changing the setting to exit the setting screen APH 2 0 for NT 1 To conceal the power plug icon on the task bar select the Settings tab on the above setting screen uncheck the Show Icon in Taskbar check box and click OK The power plug icon disappears from the task bar AP
6. Ending Codes Ending codes Ending code Description 0 Normal termination 10 Wrong firm version or execution on other PC abnormal termination 11 Parameter error abnormal termination 14 Error in communication with the firmware abnormal termination 20 Error during file access abnormal termination 21 Abnormal file data format abnormal termination File Format The setting file for this utility is created by using a text editor or other device The extension of this file should be specified as PKL The format has the following sections and entries File format Parameter underlined parameters Section Entry are the default values Remarks General Fixed value Be sure to describe at the start Version PKL100 Fixed value Be sure to describe at the start IgnoreCommanas Selected from Off and On Be careful that if On is selected the subsequent commands are not accepted SystemParam00 Set in the Offset and Value formats 00h lt Offset lt FFh OOh lt Value lt FFh Rev C Utilities 4 69 File format continued Parameter underlined parameters Section Entry are the default values Remarks MSR ValidTracks Selected from 1 2 and 3 Selection of more than one value may be selected Beep On Off CodeType US JP FR GR SP CardStart For information on input enabled characters see SS ES Code Input
7. 0 c cece een nee ees 3 47 Ultra DMA Setting forthe HDD pr ana a a ei vee a A a al od Lee fie 3 48 Installing the Network Driver voca a wa Sabet dee ea AA 3 49 Installing the Video Driver 255 octets a Made SE ON LOA Visas Sw wT oe AE EA BEA 3 50 Installing the Sound Driver temita nce Seg oar iasa ni A Welt GAT 4 Daa 3 51 Installing the Touch Panel Driver dene oe Spee cele Sa Ve eee e a a 3 51 Installing the AG line t00 iio a ote ak CaN Sa ae SE ads Dag ay ek 3 52 Power button prohibited setting tool 2 0 6 6 eee eee nee eens 3 52 Installation for MS DOS Locally Procured Version 0006 c cece cece nes 3 54 Installation Procedure cui See ee ee E ene oh eh a Be Me eee oes 3 54 Installing the CD ROM Driver netas Hain dwg urade Chase ee ade sap eh eats anid 3 54 Installing the Network Driver s 1 204420 tie is Hebe og edie ees 3 55 Installing the Touch Panel Driver sesar teri ietrp cect eee eee ees 3 57 Setting of Touch Panel Driver sir ci cede cece A oda Lee ava deb eee daddies 3 57 Touch Panel Driver for Windows 3 57 Touch Panel Driver for MS DOS 0 00 0 ence teen ene teen ene eens 3 64 HDD Power Down Timer Setting 0 66 e en nes 3 65 Shift to the HDD power N s coc5 624 025 cthnber A dag gee des ria 3 68 Chapter 4 Utilities Types of Utilities e530 208 eae jek a da a o a date 4 1 How to Obtain Fach Utility uni rt ii A E Ns 4 4 Keyboard Firmware Related Utilities MSR Key Lock 28 key Keyboard
8. Click Add Remove OS and Drivers 3 51 5 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes 6 The reboot dialog box is displayed Click OK 7 Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the AC line tool This tool is the utility to monitor the switching of the power of the system over to the battery from the AC Line with Windows 2000 when the battery unit OI R03 option is attached For details see page 4 67 Install the AC line tool by the following procedure 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win98 Epsbatt EPSBATT EXE 2 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the AC line tool Uninstall the AC line tool by the following procedure 1 Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel 2 Select Add Remove Programs in the control panel 3 Select EPSON AC Line watching 4 Click Add Remove 5 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click OK 6 Reboot the system Power button prohibited setting tool The Power button prohibited setting tool is the tool setting the registry to prohibit the shift to the shutdown and the stand by mode even if the front power switch is pressed It can prevent the shutdown of the system even if the front power switc
9. Saving the Settings You can save the current settings as a file using the following procedure 1 Click the Save button and the Save As dialog is displayed This is the standard Windows function For details see the Windows manual 2 If you input a file name and click the Save button the settings are saved in a file Use the file extension K84 Loading the Settings Load the settings using the following procedure 1 If you click the Load button the Open dialog is displayed This is the standard Windows function For details see the Windows manual 2 If you select a file name and click the Load button the selected settings are loaded 4 46 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual New To clear the current settings and create new settings click the New button All the key settings are cleared Keytop View If you click the View button the key view window opens to let you confirm the labels and colors of the keytops You can change the size of the key view window by dragging one of its corners You can close the window by clicking the x button at the right end of the title bar Printing the Settings To print the current settings use the following steps 1 Click the Print button to display the print dialog This is the standard Windows function For details see the Windows manual 2 If you click OK the settings are printed Exit If you click the Exit button the 84 key
10. 3 Input any characters as the label Rev C Utilities 4 19 4 If you click OK the input characters are displayed on the button and the KeyLabel dialog box closes If you click Cancel the input characters are canceled Up to 20 characters can be input is regarded as a new line When the Center check box is checked the inputted character is displayed on the key top in the centered position Setting the Key Top Color For setting the key top color use the following procedure 1 Click the key to be set on key top color to make it ready for setting 2 Click Color The Color dialog box is displayed Lo El Color Basic colors EE See EE E Define Custom Colors gt gt Cancel 3 Set the key top color by clicking the color to be set from the color palette and click OK 4 20 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 To set any color other than the basic colors as a key top color click Define Custom Colors Drag the mouse on the color slider and select the color Alternatively enter the numeric value and click Add to Custom Colors Then the created color is additionally displayed on the Custom colors color palette Select the color and click OK Basic colors ETE See E EE AS ee i mE i A A EEE Eee ee EE EES Custom colors EEE Eee ee Hue 1160 Bed 1192 See 8888 El Sat fo Green 192 Co Toe OK Cancel Add to Custom Colors 5 When OK is c
11. 3 Turn on the power of the IR 320 and install the K B firmware relation utility 4 Using the utility write the MSR setting about in the K B firmware directly Or make a file describing the setting contents with a text editor and write it in the K B firmware using the utility 5 Itis now possible to input data of a magnetic card from the MSR unit 2 48 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Mounting onto an LCD Unit Connect the MSR unit to the LCD unit by following the procedure below 1 Open the connector cover of the LCD unit ZN CAUTION Do not tighten the screws too tighily If the torque is too strong the screws might be damaged Rev C Setup 2 49 Confidential Mounting an MSR Unit to a 28 Key Keyboard Unit Connect the MSR unit to the 28 Key Keyboard unit by following the procedure below 1 Remove the connector cover on the upper side of the 28 Key Keyboard unit ZN CAUTION Do not tighten the screws too tighily If the torque is too strong the screws might be damaged 2 50 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Utility In order to input the magnetic card data by using the MSR unit use the utilites to set up reading data match for various magnetic cards and writing in the K B firmware of the setting contents Refer to Chapter 4 Utililties for the installation and the way of using for each utility Setting the function of the MSR unit and
12. Spare Floppy disk drive controller Spare DMAZ2 16 bits Controller 1 cascade Spare Spare NI QO O BR WwW hd Spare When LPT1 is in ECP mode use one of these channels System Interrupts The system connects 2 8259A equivalent interrupt controllers in cascade and has 15 levels of interrupts besides NMIs The following table shows the application for each interrupt Change the system interrupts with the BIOS setup program or Plug amp Play function System interrupts Controller 1 Controller 2 Application Changeable IRQO Timer NO IRQ Keyboard NO IRQ2 Controller 2 cascade NO RQ8 RTC NO RQO ACPI NO RQ10 Serial port 4 OK RQ11 Serial port 3 OK RQI2 Mouse OK RQ13 Numerical operation coprocessor NO RQ14 Hard disk controller primary 2 RQ15 Hard disk controller secondary K RQ3 Serial port 2 OK RQ4 Serial port 1 OK RQ5 Not used OK RQ6 Floppy disk controller NO 8 RQ7 Parallel port 1 OK NMI I O error check NO PCI for example network is automatically set through the detection of the unused interrupt level 2 Changes are not possible when the device is in use but can be cleared when not in use 3 This can be set to Not used in the BIOS setup but the IRQ is not released 7 4 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Hardware Specific
13. The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome screen is displayed Click Next OS and Drivers 3 47 3 The License Agreement screen is displayed Click Yes 4 The Readme Information dialog box is displayed Click Next 5 The Reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish 6 After the system is restarted the Chipset drivers are installed 7 After installation according to the instructions on the screen reboot the system Uninstalling the chipset driver for Intel Uninstalling cannot be done Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD You can set the HDD to the DMA mode by following the steps below 1 Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel 2 Select System in the control panel 3 The system Properties dialog box appears Click the Device Manager tab 4 Select GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47 from Disk drives and click Properties System Properties 2 x General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type View devices by connection ml Computer H CDROM a Disk drives 5 GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE4 GENERIC NEC FLOPPY DISK E a Display adapters Floppy disk controllers Hard disk controllers HS Mouse H E Network adapters E Ports COM amp LPT E Sound video and game controllers E M System devices E E Universal Serial Bus controllers Properties Refresh Remove Print 5 The
14. command set the communication settings following the instructions below Baud rate 9600 bps Word length 8 bits Parity None See the instruction manual for the TM printer for the setup procedure Customer display connect port When testing the customer display connect the customer display to the customer display port Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 1 Confidential Table 6 1 Conditions continued Setting Condition Setting of DIP switches for the customer display When the TM printer is connected to COM Set the communication settings following the instructions below when the TM printer has the ID function ESC POS GS commana Baud rate Same settings as for the TM printer 9600 bps Word length Same settings as for the TM printer 8 bits Parity Same settings as for the TM printer None Set the communication settings following the instructions below when the TM printer does not have the ID function ESC POS GS command Baud rate 9600 bps Word length 8 bits Parity None When the TM printer is connected to another port besides COM Set the communication settings of the customer display following the instructions below Baud rate 9600 bps Word length 8 bits Parity None For the setup procedure see the instruction manual for the TM display Connection of the cash drawer To check the kick back motion of the drawer connect the cash drawer Connection of t
15. 1 Open the Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON Serial Driver is selected Click Change Remove 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the AC line tool This tool is the utility to monitor the switching of the power of the system over to the battery from the AC Line with Windows 2000 when the battery unit OI R03 option is attached For details see page 4 67 Install the AC Line tool using the following procedure 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start WinXP Epsbatt EPSBATT EXE 2 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the AC line tool Uninstall the AC Line tool using the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON AC Line watching is selected Click Change Remove 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click OK 3 30 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technic
16. 2 30 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 Remove the two cables for the LCD unit from their connectors Rev C Setup 2 31 Confidential 6 Slide the LCD unit until it hits the upper limit of the slide range while pressing the lock lever on the left side of the LCD unit Slightly pull the part circled in the illustration below in the direction of the arrow and slide the LCD unit upward further on the back Adjust the position of the LCD unit while watching the hole shown in the figure so that the tabs of the main body can be disengaged from the grooves in the LCD unit Remove the LCD unit in the direction of arrow 5 DM LR104T 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 2 32 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector Rev C Setup 2 33 Confidential 6 Slide the lock located under the LCD unit to the right for unlocking 7 Slide the LCD unit until it hits the upper limit of the slide range Slightly pull the part circled in the illustration below in the direction of the arrow and slide the LCD unit upward further on the back Adjust the position of the LCD
17. If burrs are left after the hatched part is removed they may cause cuts or scratches Remove the burrs left on the printer tray with a cutter or file them down 2 52 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 2 To get power for the TM printer from the IR 320 remove one or more tabs from the DC cable exit by breaking them off with a pair of pliers 3 When setting up the TM printer on the printer tray wrap the cable around the poles on the other side of the tray as shown below to keep it out of the way 4 Slide the printer tray in the direction of the arrow and fit the hooks on the printer tray into the slots in the IR 320 gt Ol R01 001 Ol R01 022 Rev C Setup 2 53 Confidential 5 Attach the printer tray with two screws OI RO1 001 OI RO1 022 6 To get power for the TM printer from the IR 320 remove one or more tabs on the rear cover to make a hole for cables to pass through 7 Attach the rear cover with one screw 8 Install the TM printer on the printer tray Installing a Printer Dedicated printers are designed especially for the IR systems Any of theses printers can be installed directly on the main body Other types of TM printer can be used on the printer tray described in the previous section Installing a TM Printer The power supply to the printer can be tapped from the TM power connector
18. Install the APD Advanced Printer Driver Setup the APD and print the status sheet of the printer using the test Print from Windows application using the test Installing procedure of APD Install the APD using the following procedure 1 Start up the system and execute the driver of the following folder C BACKUP APDRV EXE The License Agreement dialog is displayed Select the I accept the terms in the License agreement check box click NEXT The Location to Save Files dialog is displayed Choose the folder in the installation place and click NEXT C Program Files EPSON Advanced Printer Driver Setup are chosen in the default The file is extracted and the Select OS dialog is displayed Choose your OS in the Select Install OS box Confirm that US is chosen in Select Install Language Click NEXT The Select Module dialog is displayed Choose the printer driver to install Also choose the overwriting condition of the file in Universal Driver Overwrite The printer driver has the following types When you click Finish the file is copied into the specified folder 2 72 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 6 7 Receipt It is printed on the receipt paper without changing the character size Reduce35 It prints the print image of Windows in a reduced size the receipt paper size After the installation of the APD is completed the dialog to confirm the restart of the computer
19. The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON Touch Panel Driver is selected Click Change Remove The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes The reboot dialog box is displayed Click OK Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed Click OK Setting the recognition range of the double click When connecting the LCD with the touch panel and making a setup the touch panel driver is automatically installed and the double click setting registry key of Windows is modified But when a new user first logs on the default value of Windows is applied to the value of the registry key so the registry key must be modified for individual users When you set up Windows 2000 and create a new user you have to modify the registry key for individual users by following the steps below Q Note The administrator does the modification of the registry key Method Select Programs Epson Touch Panel Tool Touch Panel Configuration Tool from the Start menu Click OK There is no need to do any other operation 3 36 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Installing the Serial Port Driver When the serial port is transmitting with Windows 2000 this Driver prevents the OS from shifting to the Standby mode and the operation of the full on mode is continued
20. Type Ni Cd 8 cell 600 mAh Charging time About 32 hours Charging method Trickle The charging and backup times change according to environmental conditions To use the battery unit install the dedicated Power Management Driver APM2 0 supplied with the battery unit for Windows NT Rev C Setup 2 39 Confidential The battery unit begins to be charged when the IR 320 main side power switch is turned on After installing a battery unit set System Battery to Equipped using the Power Management menu in the BIOS setup utility Gee Chapter 6 Q Note for Users in the United States The battery unit OI R03 is powered by a nickel cadmium battery which is recyclable At the end of its useful life it is illegal under various state and local laws to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream Call 1 600 8 BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery QO Note The battery unit is not charged even if power is being supplied and the main power switch is on unless the power is in full on mode The battery unit cannot be used for the IR 320 connected with the 3 5 HDD The battery unit has not yet been charged when it is purchased Charge the battery unit before using it The nickel cadmium battery must be recycled or disposed of properly The life of the battery unit is approximately 2 to 2 5 years Replace the battery unit accordingly Install the battery unit following the steps below 1 Remove the
21. kyl and other files of each of the units at this time If you are using an MSR create a definition file pkl file using a text editor Copy each of the definition files onto a floppy disk or other appropriate media Create an appropriate folder in the hard disk of each system and copy the definition files stored on the floppy disk to that folder Using an appropriate definition data setting utility write the contents of the definition files into the keyboard firmware Because the definition data setting utility only defines one file at a time write the settings for the Key Lock and 28 key keyboard sequentially You can create a batch file to execute this operation so that the definition data can be rewritten each time the system is started or the definition data can also be rewritten using a file on a server on an intranet Utilities 4 7 Although the keyboard firmware itself can be written by using a keyboard firmware rewriting tool such tools are not available for Windows Settings of MSR PKMODE32 EXE Win PKMODE2 EXE DOS Definition of the Key Lock KEYLOCKCFG EXE Win Definition of the 28 keyboard 28KEYCFG EXE Win POSKB28 EXE DOS lt gt Definition of the 28 keyboard Layer supported 28KYCFGL EXE Win Definition of the 84 keyboard 84KEYCFG EXE Win POSKB EXE DOS lt gt Exxx File name Extension Win Windows DOS DOS Installing 5 SR
22. Do not press the paper FEED switch f the TM printer does not meet these conditions correct the problem and then select the Initialize option from the menu bar f all the above conditions are satisfied probable causes are the following Q The print head has overheated Q The TM printer is not working Q he TM printer interface circuit of the IR 320 does not operate normally Hardware error The print head is overheated or the printer is not working Paper feeding 2 The TM printer is feeding paper Receipt end 3 The receipt paper path contains no paper Journal end 4 The journal paper path contains no paper Paper near end 5 The paper roll is out of paper or is not installed Receipt near end 6 The receipt paper roll is out of paper or is not installed Journal near end 7 The journal paper roll is out of paper or is not installed Cover open 8 The printer cover is open On line 9 The printer is online It is possible to do a TM print test If the device self diagnostic utility detects more than one TM status it will display the highest priority message If for example TM statuses of priority 1 and 3 are detected the message of priority 1 will be displayed Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 5 Confidential The DM area on the screen indicates the communication settings and status of the DM display Table 6 4 DM Information Setting Description DM port n
23. Drivers for Windows XP Chipset drivers AC line tool Serial Driver Network drivers Touch Panel drivers Video drivers Common OS utility drivers OPOS ADK Advanced Printer driver TM driver DM MS Definition tool Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Readme txt files are in both the root directory and in subdirectories of the root directory 1 The Readme txt file in the root directory contains an overview of this CD ROM and refers to the Readme txt files in the various subdirectories 2 The Readme txt files in the operating system subdirectories explain driver installation un installation for each operating system 3 Readme txt files for KEYCFG OPOS ADK and APDRV are included with the software Rev C OS and Drivers 3 3 Windows 2000 Pre Installed Model The exclusive EPSON utility and drivers for using IR 320 are pre installed in the HDD with the pre installed Windows 2000 Professional Installation Procedure Windows 2000 Installation When the power supply is turned on the installation starts Enter the product key of the W2K label pasted on the product You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Change of Double click settings Set up this setting every time a new user starts using Windows 2000 r AC line tool Installation I When using the Battery Unit OI R03 I Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the soft
24. M T88II series HH External type TM U675 series TM T285 series TM H5000 series Assignment of TM connector signals No 1 0 Signal Name 1 24 VDC 2 GND 3 NC DKD Connector The DKD connector which is located on the rear panel is a connector for the cash drawer The connector is a 6 pin modular connector JT DKD connector pin assignments No Signal name 1 0 Description 1 FG Frame ground 2 DKD1 O Drawer 1 kick out signal LOW Open 3 DK Status Drawer status signal Low High is different with the specification of the Drawer Rev C Hardware Specifications 7 11 DKD connector pin assignments 4 24 V 24 V DC of electrical power 5 DKD2 O Drawer 2 kick out signal LOW Open 6 SG Signal ground Customer Display Connector Connect a DM D series customer display to the customer display connector The connector is an 8 pin modular connector m DM D connector pin assignments No Signal name 1 0 Description 1 FG frame GND Frame ground 2 RXD not used Received data not used with this unit 3 TXD O Transmission data 4 DTR not used O Unit ready signal always at ready 5 DSR CTS Customer display ready signal 6 SG signal GND Signal ground 7 24 V DC 24 V of electrical power 8 PG
25. On Chip Primary PCI IDE Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled On Chip Secondary PCI Disabled Enabled Enabled IDE Auto IDE Primary Master PIO Auto Auto Auto Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 IDE Primary Slave PIO Auto Auto Auto Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Rev C 5 23 BIOS Functions Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default IDE Secondary Master PIO Auto Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Auto Auto IDE Secondary Slave PIO Auto Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Auto Auto DE Primary Master UDMA Disabled Auto Auto DE Primary Slave UDMA Disabled Auto Auto DE Secondary Master UDMA Disabled Auto Auto DE Secondary Slave UDMA Disabled Auto Auto Auto USB Controller Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled USB Keyboard Support Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled AC97 Audio Auto Disabled Auto Auto Onboard LAN Device Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 5 24 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item IDE HDD Block Mode Options Disabled Enabled Fail Safe Default Disabled Optimized Default Enabled Onboard Lan Boot ROM Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Onboard FDC Controller Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Onboard Serial Port 1 Onboard Serial Port 2 Disabled 3
26. Second 0 59 5 18 BIOS Functions Rev C 2 IDE Primary master IDE primary slave IDE secondary master IDE secondary slave IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item Options Notice IDE Primary Master None Set the detection method for the connection device Primary Slave Auto None The connection detection is not executed It is treated as Secondary Master Manual disconnected software Secondary Slave Auto Auto detection is executed The information held by the device is automatically applied Manual The information set by the user is applied Access Mode CHS Set the access Method to the connected device Note that when the LBA device detection method is set as None it cannot be changed Large CHS Access for the device is shortened with Cylinder Head Sector Auto Addressing having 0 to 1023 cylinders O to 15 heads and O to 63 sectors LBA Shortened with the Logical Block Addressing Method the entire memory area is divided into access units and those serial numbers are used for accessing Large This is the access method for extended CHS When the number of CHS cylinders exceeds the normal amount of 1024 cylinders the address is not accessible so the CHS is extended Auto BIOS determines the optimum method based on the information obtained by the device The LBA method is normally used Capacity This item indicates the memory capacity for the connection device The following di
27. To use the software keyboard after the logon select Actinkey from the Start menu The Actinkey menu is displayed EPSON Actrker Caps Sera Top x Esd nil el alee altel rel ral a Pin Scr Paul Bs Ins E E Dell End When the check box at the top right is checked the software keyboard is always displayed in the upper part To exit Actinkey click the upper right X Rev C Utilities 4 51 Do not use this tool for the hardware keyboard or it may respond with the wrong keyboard status The tool is applicable to the 101 102 106 key keyboards however the operation cannot be guaranteed when the OS is not in Japanese or English EPSON OPOS ADK OLE Object Linkage and Embedding is component software that runs on the OS of Win 32 bit style such as Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Depending on how the software components have been created the software may be reusable or reversely compatible The objective of the OLE POS OPOS is to use the OLE to standardize the control system APD for the peripheral units of the POS By this standardization the application and peripheral unit control software become open and generic The OPOS standardizes the interface between the POS application and the device control object which depends on the device or the manufacturer The OPOS also facilitates the transplant of the application and the reconfiguration of the peripheral devices Because of standardization of the peripheral devices a l
28. and Stop Grant MODEM Use IRQ Use this setting on a system with a modem when access to the modem IRQ resource trap is treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode or when the power is turned on by a ring signal when the Power On by Ring setting is set to Enabled The default setting is NA This setting is the IRQ resource number allocated to the modem serial port Rev C 5 13 BIOS Functions Table 5 5 Power Management Setup menu continued Items Description Suspend Mode Select the time it takes for the system to enter Suspend Mode by BIOS from option settings The default setting is Disabled Be careful not to set the time value too small as the system may frequently switch between Full On Mode and Suspend Mode Setting for OS Windows NT Because entering the Suspend mode on Windows NT creates a delay in the timer of the operating system be sure that the suspend timer setting is functioning properly Windows 98 2000 XP For Windows 98 and later operating systems set the suspend timer from the system The BIOS suspend timer is ignored regardless of the setting HDD Power Select the item it takes for the HDD to enter the Power Down mode by BIOS from option setting Down The default setting is Disabled This function was added from Ver 2 11 02 And the version of before Ver 2 11 01 does not have this function Soft Off by PWR Sets the function of the Power Button switch when
29. and select Next to proceed The Windows Product Key screen is displayed Input the 25 digit product key shown on the COA Certificate of Authenticity Select Next to begin setup If you enter an incorrect key a message is displayed indicating that Select Re enter valid product key and then select Next to return to the Windows Protect Key screen ad input the product key again According to the instructions on the screen input the necessary items and continue installing When copying of the file is completed take the Setup disk of the MS DOS out of the FDD and then according to the instructions on the screen reboot the system After rebooting the system according to the instructions on the screen set up the Network and the Date Time According to the instructions on the screen reboot the system Drivers for the system are installed by Plug and Play According to the instructions on the screen input the necessary items and continue installing When installing is completed and according to the instructions on the screen reboot the system The desktop screen is displayed ZN CAUTION Setup is executed with the VGA display Installing the Chipset Driver for Intel Q Note The Chipset Driver must be installed before installing other drivers This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 2 Rev C Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive and start Win98 Chipset infinst_enu exe
30. and the following devices are supported by the firmware of this keyboard controller e Key Lock of IR 320 e MSR DM MR123 e 28 key keyboard DM KR028 e PS 2 keyboard e Extemally connected POS keyboard The input data from these devices is converted into the scan code of the keyboard according to the code conversion table in the keyboard firmware all of which is then handled as keyboard input on the system side Code Conversion User s table Application Definition data T Scan Code Keyboard of Keyboard Keyboard PS 2 keyboard System Controller Firmware POS keyboard Key definition data The code conversion table has the key definition data for converting the setting values and input data of each device into a scan code which can be rewritten by the utility of each device However the externally connected POS keyboard must be set by using a special tool and the setting values are then written into the memory in the keyboard The following operations can be performed by having the IR 320 manage the code conversion table e Key definition data and other data that may change frequently can be managed separately from applications This will reduce the number of application development steps Rev C Utilities 4 5 e Change and management can be performed easily since key definition data is in the system By creating a bat
31. do not use the IR 320 at high temperatures and high humidity and never operate it where dew may condense on it The battery contains flammable substances such as lithium and an organic solvent Do not short circuit disassemble deform heat or throw the battery into a fire The fire may cause the battery to generate heat burst and ignite Interface Serial Connectors The IR 320 has four NS16550 compatible serial ports COM1 COM2 COM5 COM6 It has four outside connectors however COM5 and COM6 cannot be used by default Assign COM5 and COM to interrupts not in use 1 5 00000 0000 6 9 Assignment of serial connector signals No Signal name 1 0 Description 1 DCD power supply 5 1 Carrier detection signal or power supply output 2 RXD Received data signal 3 TXD O Transmission data signal 4 DTR O Terminal ready signal 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data set ready signal 7 RTS O Transmission request signal 8 CTS Transmission data cleared signal 9 RI Ring signal Pin 1 can be set for 5 V output and 12 V output with the jumper settings JP7 to JP18 on the main board Rev C Hardware Specifications 7 9 Parallel Connector LPT Connector The LPT connector is a 25 pin D Sub female connector Set the LPT port to bidirectional or EPP ECP mode in BIOS setup The IR 320 does not support an OCIA interface 13 1 0000000000000 000000000000 25 14 A
32. o oooooooommcccooomo 4 5 Keyboard Firmware iia a A e A E OEY pied AY ae a a 4 5 How to Use Keyboard Firmware Related Utilities oooooooooooocrrrroraccrrrr 4 6 Tiistain enna pena id aes Sines a om act ban OS Ei 4 8 Keyboard Firmware Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 2 6 0 cece cece eens 4 10 MA A A e a e O E E As aaa 4 10 OPOS ADK Settings with the DM MR123 oooooccccccoccccccr rro 4 12 Key Lock Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 oooooccccccccoconccccrrar eee eens 4 12 MA a et Reet ete Se Id eke ote cs oes tt ue ces shee 4 12 Rev C xi Confidential Speed BUON NES AAA AE oe le PA A ag 4 13 Key Definitions isi sui eee cies Po eee E Sek nN Ra E E ale deh dee ds 4 14 Setting the Key Label iesi ssni sinrin gins a A eed ta ola Rhee Aout ae 4 14 Key Programs ti n iia STAG NO Hass db OR Ae Da cheated 4 15 Saving the Settings eiei et eee ee a Mehta a AAA ees koa 4 15 Loading the Settings iittala atin e E Beda ee es ak a ee aoa S 4 16 NeW sist td a ada ai od whale te 4 16 A ON NN 4 16 28 Key Definition Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 ooooocccccoocconccrorancrr 4 17 SAID E AA A tt 4 17 Speed BUON teess mse da ed uate A a na 4 18 Key Definitions 3 3122 A A A GA E Pe PSs da 4 19 Setting the Key Label omic as a da e OS EL SEA SE See LGA a 4 19 Setting the Key Top Colores ita cbs aa Shad bet eed Sede ER Bee ee BAS ea Se Rode 4 20 Key Program ea i Gu te seed ae teas Ge ie tei pea TE ed ek aes Q
33. 252 mm 9 9 271 mm 10 7 a 1 386 mm 15 2 454 5 mm 17 9 1 18 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Peripheral Dimensions of the LCD 329 mm 13 0 DM D500 jat 306 mm 12 1 DM D110 gt LBW 62 ALPOL 9 S JULI LE edAL 1 ZL a LoL UU 99Z 80A 170 L 9 1 LHUWgG67 OGAL LZ L a a 5 for 3 3 3 3 o s s Cy pes M i i 1 ols ll a 454 5 mm 17 9 U U a gt a 0 211 38 121Type 490mm 19 3 104Type 460 mm 18 1 121Type 555mm 21 9 104Type 521 mm 20 5 E The 121 type is the case size of the DM LR121Series and the 104 type is the case size of the DM LR104T I DO lt lt LO LO NO NO N A Ww sO 313 313 gt Sl ae 0 21 3 Y Y lt xe O 8 amp 121Type 310mm 104Type 276 A 3 3 3 121Type 255mm 104Type 320 mm 2 3 S Y 121Type 425mm 104Type 390 mm 7 ea put The 121 type is the case size of the DM LR121Series and the 104 type is the case size of the DM LR104T Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 19 Peripheral Dimensions of the Customer Display OLLG Wa UWES 00SC Wd L ZPUIW 69 wee f hal vos qq 62
34. 3 The default setting is 3 The normal setting is 3 to ensure a more stable system Paging Mode This setting controls the page mode for the video cache memory The options are Open and Control Close The default setting is Open The normal setting is Open because it operates in the page open mode RAS to CAS This setting determines how much time is required until performing the transfer to CAS following Override the video cache memory RAS The options are the by CAS LT setting and the Override 2 setting The default setting is the by CAS LT setting Normally the CAS Latency setting is used to automatically set the by CAS LT setting RAS Timing This setting is used to set the RAS access timing for the video cache memory The two options are Fast and Slow The default setting is Fast Normally the Fast setting is used to ensure better performance RAS Precharge Timing This setting sets the number of clocks to allocate to RAS in order to accumulate the necessary charge before refresh of the video cache memory is performed There are two options Fast and Slow The default setting is Fast Normally the Fast setting is used to ensure better performance 5 10 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Integrated Peripherals Menu This menu sets the items related to I O ports such as the IDE controller the transfer mode the serial ports and the para
35. 310 Compared to the IR 320 B 3 Option Comparison Here is a comparison of the options Item IR 310 IR 320 LCD unit DM LR104 Can be used Cannot be used DM LR104SV Can be used Cannot be used DM LR104T Can be used DM LR121SV Can be used DM LR121SL Cannot be used Can be used Keyboard DM KRO28 Can be used e DM KRO84 Can be used MSR unit DM MR112 for Can be used Japan DM MR123 for Can be used countries except Japan Customer display DM D110 Can be used e DM D102 x15 Can be used Cannot be used DM D210 Can be used DM D500 Can be used Twin pole Ol R08 Can be used Exclusive TM printer TM T88IIR Can be used e TM U210AR Can be used e TM H3000R Can be used Printer tray Ol R01 001 Can be used Ol R01 022 Can be used Solid disc Ol M04 Cannot be used PCMCIA board OI B0 6 Cannot be used NV RAM Ol M06 Can be used Cannot be used Sound board Ol B07 Can be used Cannot be used CD ROM drive Ol RO6 002 Can be used CD R RW drive Ol RO6 052 Can be used Front CompactFlash Adapter Ol RO7 Can be used e Battery pack OI RO3 Can be used e B 4 The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 Rev C Software Comparison Here is a comparison of the software IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item IR 310 IR 320 OS
36. Add Remove Programs in the control panel 3 Select SoundMAX NT 4 Click Add Remove 5 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes 6 Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed Click OK 7 The reboot dialog box is displayed Click OK 8 Reboot the system Installing the Touch Panel Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Winnt Touch EPSTPNT EXE 2 The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C Program Files EPSON TouchPanel 4 The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system 3 44 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Uninstalling the Touch Panel driver 1 2 3 4 Rev C Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel Select Add Remove Programs in the control panel Select EPSON Touch Panel Driver Click Add Remove The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes The reboot dialog box is displayed Click OK Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed Click OK OS and Drivers 3 45 Installation for Windows 98 Locally Procured Edition Installation Procedu
37. CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Dissw DISSW EXE 2 The following message is displayed Click Yes If No is clicked the installation stops processing and returns you to Windows Registry setting E xj gt When you press the power button on IM Series this program sets Windows 98 2000 to 2 do nothing Do you want to continue i No 3 38 OS and Drivers Rev C Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual When setting the registry the following message is displayed Click Yes so Windows is restarted and the setting becomes valid When click No the setting returns to Windows without becoming valid In this case if restarting Windows the setting becomes valid Registry setting x 2 To finish setting you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer now OS and Drivers 3 39 Installation for Windows NT Locally Procured Edition Y Note If you use Windows NT you need to install Service Pack 6a Installation Procedure Ifyou install Windows NT Local procured edition follow the steps below Operating System Installation Insert the CD ROM for Windows NT and turn on the IR 320 to perform the setup Enter the product key of the COA package You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Network Driver Installation Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Service Pack 6a Installation Obtain Service Pack 6a and i
38. CD ROM of IR 320 The Release note is displayed Click Next The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The License Agreement dialog box is displayed Click Yes Installing is completed and the reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that No I will restart my computer later is selected and click Finish Finish the COMMAND PROMPT using Exit Enter Change the CD ROM Eject the Driver CD ROM of IR 320 Insert the CD ROM of Windows 2000 Video Driver Install End 1 7 8 The Windows 2000 Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next Input the necessary information and continue the installation according to the instructions on the screen The Your Product Key screen is displayed Input the 25 digit product key shown on the COA Certificate of Authenticity Click Next to begin setup Input the necessary information and continue the installation according to the instructions on the screen When the installation is completed click Finish according to the instructions on the screen After the system is rebooted the Network Identification wizard is started Click Next Set the Password according to the instructions on the screen The installation is completed and the desktop screen of Windows 2000 is displayed ZN CAUTION Setup is executed with the VGA display Rev C OS and Drivers 3 33 Installing the Intel Chipset Diver Q Note The Chips
39. Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 10 Secure the printer unit with two screws 11 Reattach the side cover Device Diagnostics Utility It is possible to confirm the operation of a dedicated printer unit by using the Device Diagnostics Utility If you turn on the power supply of the IR 320 and press the F10 key while the POST Power On Self Test screen is displayed the Device Diagnostics Utility is displayed TM Drawer area It confirms the communication speed and the status of the dedicated printer unit Device Tests menu When executing TM print test a test printing is printed to the dedicated printer unit Refer to Device Diagnost ics Utility of Appendix A BIOS Functions for the operating method of the Device Diagnostics Utility Other Operating Confirmation The operation of a dedicated printer unit can be confirmed by using the following procedure instead of using the Device Diagnostics Utility 1 While holding down the Paper feed switch on the upper part of the IR 320 turn on the power supply of the IR 320 2 The setting contents of the present printer are printed out from the dedicated printer unit Confirm that it is printed out correctly Rev C Setup 2 59 Confidential Installing a PCI Board The IR 320 has two PCI expansion slots E Ge o PCI slots The maximum dimensions of t
40. Definition file pkl Wr itting Create this file LOAD EXE using a text editor PKLOAD EXE DOS i Nadi Definition file kyl Writting Definition file k28 D Writting Writting PKLDL32 EXE Win PKLDL EXE DOS Keyboard Firmware PKLOAD32 EXE Win wore f PKLOAD EXE DOS Definition of the Key Lock Definition of PKLOAD32 EXE Win r j PKLOAD EXE DOS f i the 28 keyboard lt gt Definition file 128 Ju l Definition of the 28 keyboard Layer supported C Definition file k84 ua PKLDL32 EXE Win r PKLDL EXE DOS i the 84 keyboard Definition file FLD je Writting Definition of Rewr itting the Firmware PKUPDT2 EXE DOS a The following four utilities can be used after they are installed e Keyboard Firm Setting utility e Key Lock Setting utility e 28 Key Definition utility a Automatic Definition Data Setting utility For installation use the following procedure 1 Execute C Backup keycfg win Disk1 Setup exe 2 The installation program starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Specify the destination of the installation directory c Program Files Key Config is the default Click Next 4 8 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Referenc
41. F Full size of HD Please push a key of 1 or F _ 5 Select the range to format as the system area on the hard disk Press the 1 key to select 10GB or press the F key to select the full size After that the OS recovery starts 6 Following the title EasyRestore the EPSON Logo Startup screen is displayed Select Continue 7 After the OS is recovered set up the OS 8 Return the printer driver for OPOS and Windows saved in Preparing a Recovery Medium Restrictions m Rev C The size of the image data to be saved amounts to 500 600 MB Saving this much data requires a large capacity device such as a CD R MO or server Because of restrictions of EasyRestore the HD image data file HDIMG003 PQI cannot be divided Because EasyRestore runs only on MS DOS it is a requirement of Saving of HD Image Data that MS DOS can recognize the saving destination device When startup is initiated from the built in hard disk of the IR 320 recovery is impossible OS and Drivers 3 25 Installation for Windows XP Professional Locally Procured Edition Installation Procedure If you install Windows XP Professional locally procured edition follow the steps below Windows XP Professional Installation Insert the Windows XP startup disk and CD ROM then turn on the IR 320 to perform the setup Enter the product key of the COA package You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Vid
42. HDDs can be installed For information on installing the 2 5 HDD units OI HDD see the previous section Installing a 2 5 HDD Unit OI HDD The IR 320 does not start up though the battery unit OI R03 as the option is connected to the IR 320 To install the 3 5 HDD remove the currently installed HDD unit from the IR 320 install the optional HDD in the HDD unit and reinstall the HDD drive bay in the IR 320 Install the optional HDD using the following procedure ZN CAUTION Because the HDD unit is a precision instrument do not subject it to even the slightest shock or vibration Rev C Setup 2 11 Confidential 1 Removing the HDD unit 1 Open the front cover of the IR 320 If the front cover is locked unlock it with the key You may need to press in slightly as you turn the key 2 12 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 6 Ifa PCI card is installed remove it Remove the screw locking the PCI card and pull the PCI card out Rev C Setup 2 13 Confidential 7 Remove the two cables for the HDD unit from their connectors 10 Remove the four screws from the HDD unit and remove the HDD mounting plate 2 14 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 2 Installing the HDD Install the HDD using the following procedure 1 Attach the HDD to the HDD mounting plate with four
43. Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Master IDE Secondary Slave When selecting items marked with a gt such as the IDE device setting IDE Primary Master the screen for selecting options is displayed and specifications can be set DE HDD Auto Detection Push the Enter key to execute the auto detection for the device If the connection is made information obtained from the device including the access method will be applied DE Primary Master DE Primary Slave DE Secondary Master DE Secondary Slave Set the detection method for the connection device None The connection detection is not executed It is treated as disconnected software Auto Auto detection is executed The information held by the device is automatically applied Manual The information set by the user is applied Access Mode Set the access Method to the connected device Note that when the device detection method is set as None it cannot be changed CHS Access for the device is shortened with Cylinder Head Sector Addressing having 0 to 1023 cylinders 0 to 15 heads and 0 to 63 sectors LBA Shortened with the Logical Block Addressing Method the entire memory area is divided into access units and those serial numbers are used for accessing Large This is the access method for extended CHS When the number of CHS cylinders exceeds the normal amount of 1024 cylinders the address is not accessible so the CHS is exte
44. No Yes Yes 4 24 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Layer 28 key Keyboard Definition Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT and Windows 98 This utility is a utility for connecting the 28 key keyboard unit DM KR028 to the IR 310 320 and using the layer function The layer function divides the key definitions for the 28 keys of the 28 key keyboard unit into units called layers makes it possible to define multiple layers and thus enables the user to make 28 keys Xx number of layers key definitions Multiple layers can be switched instantaneously through the layer change key or through software enabling input from more than 28 keys There are two versions of the Layer 28 key Keyboard Definition Utility for Windows95 98 and Windows NT 2000 The layer 28 key keyboard definition utility has not been installed in the products If you want this software contact your EPSON distributor Outline What is the Layer Function A maximum of 28 keys could be programmed in the 28 key keyboard but the key definitions varied depending on the application that was being run If defining of more than 28 keys was desired it was necessary to judge the input status in the application and switch the key inputs Then by enabling definition of the 28 keys in so called layer units and making it possible to define multiple layers 28 keys x number of layers could be defined enabling key input from more than 28 keys This
45. Onboard Serial Port 5 is changed to I O address led setting The Serial Port 6 Use IRQ can be selected if setting The IRQ resource is not assigned in Disab he Onboard Serial Port 6 is changed to I O address led setting When Onboard Parallel Port is Disabled setting Parallel Port Mode EPP Mode Select and ECP Mode Use DMAare displayed and the IRQ Resource is not assigned When the Parallel Port Mode for the EPP Mode Select is set GS EPP Or OS ECP EPP the user can then perform the necessary settings When the Parallel Port Mode for the ECP Mode Use DMA s set OS ECP Or COS ECP EPP the user can then perform the necessary settings 5 26 BIOS Functions Rev C Power Management Setup The setup items related to power management are as follows IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Video Off Method Blank Screen Blank Screen DPMS V H SYNC Blank DPMS Video Off In Suspend No Yes Yes Yes Suspend Type Stop Grant PwrOn Suspend PwrOn Suspend MODEM Use IRQ PwrOn Suspend NA 3 4 5 7 10 11 14 15 NA Suspend Mode HDD Power Down Disabled 1Min 2Min 4Min 8Min 12Min 20Min 30Min 40Min 1 Hour g isabled SSESES88E 20 3 3D 3 3 3 OMANAOOAKRWBNH lt 5 10 Min 11 Min 12 Min 13 Min 14 Min 15 Min Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Rev C 5 27 BIOS Functi
46. Oxhh d where hh is the character code when the MSR character conversion setting is in transfer or the system conversion area is offset in hexadecimal in any other case and d is the number of retry times up to six 4 48 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Y Note This utility is available only with an English message This utility cannot be used while the key definition utility such as 28KeyCfg is in programming There is no keyboard or mouse response during reading or writing of settings Do not perform any operation that may cause interruption such as tapping on the touch panel during reading or writing of settings Setting File An example of the setting file for this utility is shown below General IgnoreCommands Off SystemParam00 49 0 SystemParam01 amp 32 amp f7 MSR Beep On CodeType US ValidTracks 1 2 3 J CodeDefinition00 48 10 CodeDefinition01 amp 31 11 Shift CodeDefinition02 amp 32 amp 0A Ctrl CardStart CS CardEnd CE Track1Start 1S Track1End 1E Track2Start 2S Track2End 2E Track3Start 3S Track3End 3E JIS2Start JS JIS2End JE In the General section an entry line that may affect the entirety is described in principle IgnoreCommands may be specified to be On When it is specified to be On the setting of the keyboard or MSR cannot be read or written SystemParamxx is described when the data is written in the system conversion area The offset and data
47. Press F10 to run device diagnostics Press F10 to boot the device diagnostics utility program Reference The version of the BIOS is displayed EPSON IM 320 BIOS Ver X YY ZZ Rev C 5 33 BIOS Functions 5 34 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Chapter 6 Device Diagnostics Utility The communication line between the devices connected to the IR 320 can be tested with the device self diagnostic utility With the device self diagnostic utility the following tests can be performed Connection condition of each device Printing test for the TM printer Display test for the customer display Operational test for the cash drawer Loop back test for the serial ports Loop back test for the LPT1 port C O O O ue wu Printing test for the printer connected to LPT1 Conditions for Running Device Diagnostics If the following conditions are not satisfied self diagnosis for each device cannot be performed Table 6 1 Conditions Setting Condition Connection to the TM printer The TM printer needs to be connected to the IR 320 body Even if you will not test the TM printer connect the TM printer to either the COM port or LPT1 Setting of the TM printer DIP Set the receive buffer to the maximum Set the selection switch connection switches non connection of the customer display to non connection if there is a selection switch If the TM printer does not have an ID function ESC POS GS
48. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next The dialog box that specifies the place of the copy of the file is displayed Input the place and click Next The default setting is C Program FilesAPRODOS When copying of the file is completed the Release note is displayed OS and Drivers 3 55 Installing the network driver Q Note Different environments require different ways of setting the Network Driver For the details of the installation procedure see the RELNOTES rtf in the C Program Files PRODOS directory in the file extracted by the preceding procedure The following example describes the procedure to install the Netware DOS ODI Client Driver 1 Copy all files in the C Program Files PRODOS ODI directory in the file extracted by the preceding procedure on the floppy disk Turn on the IR 320 to start MS DOS Insert the floppy disk copied by step 1 in the FDD of the IR 320 Copy all files in the floppy disk to the optional directory in the hard disk For example copy it to the C NWCLIENT directory Add the following description to the CONFIG SYS of the MS DOS with a text editor and save it LASTDRIVE Z Edit the following description in C NWCLIENT NET CFG with a text editor and save it The following is the example of the setting for the NET CFG LINK DRIVER E100BODI FRAME ETHERNET_802 2 SPEED 100 PROTOCOL IPX EO Ethernet_802 2 NETWARE DOS REQUESTER FIRST NETWORK DRIVE F PB BU
49. The Network Driver is provided in the form compressed in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 but MS DOS cannot extract the compressed file Therefore by using other PC to read the CD ROM install the Network driver toin the IR 320 after extracting the Network driver in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Touch Panel Driver Installation Install the Touch Panel Driver from the CD ROM for the IR 320 Installing the CD ROM Driver After installing the MS DOS locally procured edition only the CD ROM drive of the IR 320 is not recognized Therefore use other PC to read the CD ROM and install the CD ROM driver to the IR 320 after copying the CD ROM driver to a floppy disk from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Y Note When using the CD ROM driver MSCDEX EXE of MS DOS is needed Install the CD ROM driver by the following procedure 1 Start the other PC to read the CD ROM and insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 to the CD ROM drive Insert a formatted floppy disk in the FDD 3 54 OS and Drivers Rev C 8 IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Copy Dos62 CDROM CDATAPLSYS in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 to the floppy disk Turn on the IR 320 to start MS DOS Insert the floppy disk copied by step 2 in the FDD of the IR 320 Copy the CDATAPI SYS on the floppy disk to the optional directory in the hard disk For example copy it on C DOS directory Add the following description to the CONFIG SYS of MS DOS with a text edit
50. There are two options Not Equipped and Equipped Reload Global Timer Events Sets the event to reload reset the BIOS power management timer This is treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode Primary IDE 0 IDE primary master access I O trap is generated Primary IDE 1 IDE primary slave access I O trap is generated Secondary IDE 0 IDE secondary master access I O trap is generated Secondary IDE 1 IDE secondary slave access I O trap is generated FDD COM LPT Port Access to the floppy disk drive serial port or the parallel port is generated PCI PIRQ A D APC interrupt request I O trap is generated The default setting are as follows Primary IDE O Enabled Primary IDE 1 Disabled Secondary IDE 0 Disabled Secondary IDE 1 Disabled FDD COM LPT Port Enabled PCI PIRQ A D Disabled Supplementary Explanation for Power Management Hard Disk Drive Power Down Mode The HDD Power Down Timer settings are made through the OS in Windows XP 2000 98 but in Windows NT 95 and DOS the settings are made through the BIOS as detailed below To have the HDD motor stop when the HDD is not accessed for a certain time follow the steps below 1 Start up the BIOS Setup Utility 2 Select Power Management Setup 3 Select HDD Power Down 4 Select the time in the option 5 Saveit and restart Rev C 5 15 BIOS Functions After the restart when there is no HDD access for the ti
51. XP 2000 NT 98 4 10 Keyboard firmware setting utility PKMODE2 EXE MS DOS 4 53 Utility for the Key Lock This utility is used to define the keys for the Key Lock write them into the keyboard firmware and create definition files Utility Utility name OS Page Key Lock setting utility KEYLOCKCFG EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 98 4 12 Utilities for the 28 key Keyboard DM KR028 These utilities are used to define the keys for the 28 key keyboard write them into the keyboard firmware and create definition files Utility Utility name OS Page 28 key definition utility 28KEYCFG EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 98 4 17 28 key definition utility POSKB28 EXE MS DOS 4 58 Rev C Utilities 4 1 Layer supported 28 Key Definition Utilities These utilities are used to define 28 keys and support the layer function With these utilities it is possible to freely define and change the definitions of keys on the 28 key keyboard for each layer Utility Utility name OS Page Layer supported 28 key definition utility 28KYCFGL EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 4 25 and Windows 98 Layer supported 28 key automatic PKLDL32 EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 4 39 definition utility for Windows and Windows 98 Layer supported 28 key automatic PKLDL EXE MS DOS 4 40 definition utility for MS DOS Layer switching and reading library LYFUNC DLL Windows XP 2000 NT 4 42 PKFUNC DLL Utiliti
52. batch processing etc Starting The Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for Windows PKLDL32 EXE is copied to the directory specified during installation The utility is copied to C Program Files 28 KB Config 4L if a directory is not specified This utility is started by the following method A Input the following at the command prompt Path PKLDL32 Filename n Rev C Utilities 4 39 File Name This is the path name of the set file 128 n If the n option is specified the following dialog box is displayed during closing PKLDL32 je i Completed to write cofiguration A dialog box that shows the status during transfer of the settings is displayed The following contents are displayed in the dialog box nn is the layer No or the key No and rr is the number of retries up to a maximum of 6 times Switching layers Now switching to layer nn xrr Setting 28 keys Now Programming keyboard nn xrr Setting Change Layer key Now Programming layer change key nn xrr Y Notes This utility is available in an English message version only This utility cannot be used during programming with 28keyCfg or other key definition utility The keyboard and mouse do not respond during reading or writing of the settings 0D oO oO O As much as possible do not perform any operations that would generate an interrupt such as tapping the touch panel during reading or writing of the settings The
53. be connected to the IR 320 Model name Specification DM D1 10 210 20 characters x 2 lines DM D500 256 x 64 dots graphics mode 32 characters x 4 lines font A 42 characters x 8 lines font B AN 3 a DM D110 DM D210 DM D500 2 62 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Depending on its type the customer display may need the optional DM D extension unit for the IR series DP 504 for connection to the IR 320 Check your customer display to determine whether it needs the extension E fixing screws support A support B for extension Operating progress 1 Set up the Customer display with the IR 320 2 Turn on the power supply of the IR 320 and start up the Device Diagnostics Utility 3 Confirm that the Customer display is connected correctly and displays correctly by using the Device diagnostics Utility Setup procedure Follow the procedure below to attach a Customer display 1 Pass the cable for the DM D500 through support A and attach support A to the DM D500 When using support B for extension insert the tab on support B into the hole on support A until it clicks when using support B for extension 2 Attach the base to the attachment position on the IR 320 Rev C Setup 2 63 Confidential Q Note When attaching the base note that the corners of the base are set as shown below 4 Install the extension on th
54. be made through the LPT1 print test When the test finishes normally OK is displayed in the message area of the screen When the test fails an error message is displayed 6 12 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Q LPT print test The LPT1 print test prints the standard print pattern onto the printer connected to the LPT1 port When the test finishes normally OK is displayed in the message area of the screen When the test fails an error message is displayed Y NOTE Set the BIOS of the COM LPT port in default For the COM5 6 test set the COM1 2 to Disable and set the COM5 6 to the follows COM5 FSF8 TRQ4 COM6 F2F8 IRQ3 Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 13 Confidential 6 14 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C Chapter 7 Hardware Specifications System Diagram IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The IR 320 consists of three boards The device and the interface connected to each board are as follows Rev C Main Board COM1 O Cc COM2 COM5 COM6 Ethernet HDD LPT CD ROM CD R RW Front CF O JJ Y x Cc g z S 2 o wn D FD S O 8 D ES U D USB Side Front Power Switch Riser Board POS Board TM P S PCI slot ms e T P 84 28KB MSR Power Supply Main Power Switch AC Outlet Hardware Specifications 7 1 System Memory A 512 KB flash ROM is mounted on the IR 320 as the system ROM After the BIOS is boote
55. cash drawer 6 4 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Table 6 3 TM status messages Message Priority Description Disable The port connected to the TM printer is disabled Set to Enabled using BIOS setup No communications This message is displayed when a TM printer that does not have the ID function ESC POS GS command is connected Check that the TM printer s DIP switches are set to the following Baud rate 9600 bps Word length 8 bits Parity None If DIP switches are set correctly the device self diagnostic utility can communicate with the TM printer even though the message is displayed If any abnormality is detected examine the check items specified in this column When a TM printer that has the ID function ESC POS GS I command is connected he device self diagnostic utility cannot communicate with the TM printer for some reason Check the following items Q Are the interface cable and power cable connected to the TM printer correctly Before connecting the cables be sure to power off the IR 320 Q Is the printer s power switch on Q Is the TM printer connected to the port selected at startup of the device self diagnostic utility Q Is the self test for the TM printer not executed at start up of the device self diagnostic utility Do not execute the self test Q Is the paper FEED switch not pressed at start up of the device self diagnostic utility
56. changed Network Driver Realtek Intel Changed Yes Sound Driver Ess Analog Changed Yes Devices Touch Panel Driver EPSON EPSON Not Yes changed Fujitsu Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Video Driver Chips Intel Changed Yes Screen saver EPSON Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Win Chipset Driver Intel New Yes 2000 Power Switch Disable EPSON New Yes Supported by BIOS tool IR 310 AC Line watching tool EPSON New No Not supported by IR 310 Serial driver Microsoft EPSON Changed Yes For IM 320 reload of the standby timer is supported Logon tool EPSON EPSON Not Yes changed NVRAM utility EPSON Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Network Driver Realtek Intel Changed Yes Sound Driver Ess Analog Changed Yes Devices Touch Panel Driver EPSON EPSON Changed Yes Support with ACPI mode is added Fujitsu Deleted No Not supported by IR 320 Video Driver Chips Intel Changed Yes WinXP Chipset Driver Intel New Yes AC Line monitoring EPSON New No Not supported by tool IR 320 Network Driver Realtek Intel Changed Yes Touch Panel Driver EPSON EPSON Changed Yes Support with ACPI mode is added Video Driver Chips Intel Changed Yes Rev C The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 B 7 B 8 The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Appendix C Serial Handshaking Overview of the TM Printer and the Customer Display Connections The recommended control line connections for the TM Printer and its peripherals are the defa
57. displayed Input the 25 digit product key shown on the COA Certificate of Authenticity Click Next to begin setup If you enter an incorrect key a message is displayed indicating that Select Re enter valid product key and then click Next to return to the Windows Protect Key screen and input the product key again 7 When setup is completed the Congratulations screen is displayed Click Finish 8 The system asks you to set the Date and Time properties Check the properties displayed and change them as needed Click Close to confirm the settings 9 The system setting is automatically updated the system is rebooted and the Windows 98 SE desktop appears Support Information Select the My Computer icon on the desktop click the right mouse button and select Properties from the pull down menu Click the Support Information button the information on the contact is displayed Rev C SEIKO EPSON Corp x If you have any questions concerning this product please contact your system developer OS and Drivers 3 23 Recovering the OS Preparing recovery media Q Preparing a start up disk 1 2 7 Start the MS DOS Prompt Go to the C backup recovery bootfd directory Execute MKDISK bat Insert a floppy disk in the FDD Press Enter to start formatting A message asking whether you are going to format another floppy disk is displayed Press N and Enter Then the necessary files are copied onto the floppy disk
58. displayed Input the Name and Organization then click Next 5 The Registration dialog box is displayed Input the product key entered on the cover of the First Step Guide in the COA Certificate of Authenticity package included with this product then click Next 6 The Computer Name dialog box is displayed Input the Computer Name then click Next 7 The Administrator Account dialog box is displayed Input the Password and Confirm Password then click Next 8 The Windows NT Setup dialog box is displayed Click Finish 9 The system will restart automatically 10 Windows NT starts and the setup is completed ZN CAUTION The setup is executed with the SVGA display Adding the Windows NT Applications When adding any Windows NT application specify the C 1I386 directory In this directory M1386 has been backed up from the Windows NT CD ROM Rev C OS and Drivers 3 17 Support Information Right click the My Computer icon and select Properties from the pull down menu Then the System properties are displayed System Properties SEIKO EPSON Corp 3 18 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Recovering the OS Preparing recovery media Q Preparing a start up disk 1 Start the command prompt 2 Go to the C backup recovery bootfd directory 3 Execute MKDISK bat 4 Insert a floppy disk in the FDD 5 Press Enter to start formatting 6 A message asking whether you are
59. displayed Set the date and time then click Next The Networking Settings screen is displayed Select either Typical Settings or Custom Settings according to the environment then click Next The Networking Components screen is displayed if Custom Settings is selected Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next The Workgroup or Computer Domain screen is displayed Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next The system will start automatically when Restart is clicked The Network Identification Wizard starts Click Next The Users of this Computer screen is displayed Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next The Completing the Network Identification Wizard screen is displayed Click Finish Windows 2000 starts and the setup is completed OS and Drivers 3 7 ZN CAUTION The setup is executed with the SVGA display Setting the recognition range of the double click When connecting the LCD with the touch panel and making a setup the touch panel driver is automatically installed and the double click setting registry key of Windows is modified But when a new user first logs on the default value of Windows is applied to the value of the registry key so the registry key must be modified for individual users When you set up Windows 2000 and create a new user you have to modify the registry key for individual users by following the steps below Q No
60. drive IDE interface boot possible NV RAM option Available Not available Rev C The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 B 1 Item IR 310 IR 320 CompactFlash Front CompactFlash Installation possible instead of Adapter the CD ROM Built in Available Not available Interface Network Installed on the x1 POS board Installed on the x1 main board Keyboard mouse x1 PS 2 compatible 6 pin lt miniDIN Serial x4 D sub 9 pin male lt 5V or 12V can be output to No 1 pin by setting jumpers Parallel x1 D sub 25 pin female EPP ECP compatible Display x1 D sub 15 pin female USB x2 Revision 1 1 Customer display x Installed on the x1 POS board Drawer x1 2 drive External printer power Installed on the x1 24V POS supply Sound input output board Not available Eternal line input output mike input Extension slot PCI slot x2 3 3V is available Rev 2 1 x2 3 3V is available Rev 2 2 Power Supply Specification 100 240V 50 60Hz 180W lt Output specification 5V 3 3V 12V 12V 24V AC Outlet Two types not available Available 3A available 3A AC outlet protection Breaker or fuse Fuse Backup Charge Charging at system on Charging prohibited battery for RTC Type F CR 2032 Data storing time 40 days with NV RAM 5 years 200 days without NV RAM Battery pack NiCd battery for data Available option storing at AC pow
61. edition Note There is no layer version of the 28 key definition utility for DOS 4 26 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installation Procedure Note This explanation is for Windows 2000 For Windows NT is a same operation step For Windows 95 98 differs some part of the steps so they are explained later Install this utility by the following procedure 1 Double click on SETUP EXE to start installation 2 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Confirm the contents then click the Next button 3 The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Confirm the installation destination folder the click the Next button C Program Files 28 KB Config 4L is set as the default This can be changed if necessary Choose Destination Location a ae La kS a a rstalsmedi 4 The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed Confirm the program folder name then click the Next button 28 KB Config Utilities 4L is set as the default This can be changed if necessary Select Program Folder malta Rev C Utilities 4 27 5 The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed Confirm the contents then click the Next button Start Copying Files stelsel 6 Installation begins Windows XP 2000 NT 7 The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Select Yes I want to restart my computer now and click the Finish button to restart the windows Windows 98 7 The Set
62. ee ence ene eror teen eens A 3 Magic Packet Received oportis pisaia ei PS eR i a ri A 3 Reference Informate A 3 MAC Address onet taken he aed SM diated Bis kata dees ee Sie Bead tee i Ss A 3 Appendix B The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 ALO water ts ithe ks im aia A gaat eats ana neil Gin a aad ele toe saeco Erica e B 1 Hardware Configuration viii a Sede de Beh bode te ao he B 3 Jumper and Switch Settings tc ta B 3 Option Comparison ks es gai ved oak tats See ek eke gore Mah ee eo eR Re eos NA bag od ek dead B 4 Software Comparison cinta Seip oid Sees Fa oe a ete we Pas Wea SET Se hed dee dak Aes B 5 Comparison for Driver Tool and Utility 0 066 B 6 Appendix C Serial Handshaking Overview of the TM Printer and the Customer Display Connections 6 60 c cece cece C 1 Possible Combinations of Handshaking for the TM Printers and the Customer Displays C 1 Connection Differences for Customer Displays oooocccccocoocccrrarncnr orar C 1 Flow Control Selections for Different Applications 0 00 c ccc eee eens C 1 Windows Settings s k ad etane n oh ees hd ge eu Va sie A ae Eee ee a C 2 Device Settings When Software Requires XON XOFF Handshaking with Jumper JP32 Open C 2 Device Settings When Software Requires XON XOFF Handshaking with Jumper JP32 Shorted C 3 Device Settings When Software Requires DTR DSR Handshaking 000 c eee eee C 4 Device Settings When Software Requires RTS CTS H
63. for layer supported 28 keys PKUPDT2 EXE Firmware rewriting None How to Use Keyboard Firmware Related Utilities Settings for the programming of an external POS keyboard To program an external POS keyboard it is necessary to turm off some of the keyboard firmware functions in order to prevent system malfunction Check the Ignore MSR Keyboard Commands check box in the MSR setting utility keyboard firmware setting utility or use the CMDOFF command in MS DOS Setting up one system 1 Connect the unit you are using and check its operation 2 Connect a PS 2 keyboard to the keyboard mouse connector 4 6 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual If keyboard firmware related utilities are not installed install them according to the procedure described later These utilities are not installed during the initial setup Perform key definitions and setting using the utilities provided for each of the units you are using and write them into the keyboard firmware It the same settings will be used for multiple systems create a definition file at this time This completes the setup of one system To verify the contents of the settings start Windows Notepad or another text editor and operate each unit If data is input normally the setup was successful Setting up multiple systems 1 Rev C Set up and define the units you are using for one system Create the definition files k28
64. going to format another floppy disk is displayed Press N and Enter Then the necessary files are copied onto the floppy disk 7 Amessage that the copying is over is displayed Then exit command prompt D Saving the HD image data Save all data under the C backup recovery data directory onto another medium or drive Example 1 Connect the IR 320 in network to a PC that can write data onto CD Rs 2 Save all data under the C backup recovery data directory of the IR 320 onto the PC 3 Write all data saved in step 2 onto a CD R 4 After saving the data the directory under the C backup recovery directory may be deleted 0 Backing up each driver Each directory under the C backup directory is the backup of each driver which can be backed up through individual saving Recovering method Q Editing the start up disk Edit CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXE BAT created in Preparing a Recovery Medium to the device on which the image data has been saved Q Recovering 1 Connect the medium or drive onto which the data has been saved in Preparing a Recovery Medium to the IR 320 2 Start the system by using the start up floppy disk created in Preparing a Recovery Medium Rev C OS and Drivers 3 19 3 Enter the following from the command prompt x Drive with the image file After that the OS recovery starts A gt x Enter start Enter 4 Following the title EasyRestore the EPSON Logo Startup screen is displayed Select Cont
65. is displayed Click Yes Restart the system Setting a Printer driver and fest printing Set the printer driver and test print by following the steps below 1 2 Start the system and choose Setting Printer in the start menu The Printers dialog is displayed Confirm that the icon of the installed printer driver is displayed Ex for the TM T88IIR EPSON TM T88II R Receipt It prints at usual character size EPSON TM TS88II R Reduce35_ It prints as a reduction in the receipt paper size Click the icon of the printer driver for printing and right click and choose Properties from the menu that is displayed Click the Ports tab and choose COM3 for Print to the following port Click Apply More than one printer driver can be set to the same port Click the General tab and click Print Test Page and then the print of the test page starts Confirm that it is printed normally When the print of the test page is completed the confirmation dialog is displayed When it is printed mormally click OK and close the dialog Y Note When it is not printed normally it is possibly caused by a mistake in the setup and the setting contents Refer to the procedure of Installing a Dedicated Printer Unit and The Installation procedure of the APD and then reconfirm that it is set normally Rev C Setup 2 73 Confidential Test printing from a Windows application The test print can be done from a Windows appli
66. is the layer function There are two methods of switching layers instantaneously Changing layers using the Change Layer Key Shift key type A key is defined in advance for switching to each layer with the specified layer activated while that key is pressed then key data for the specified layer being input by pressing keys while in that state Using this method it is not necessary for the application to be aware of the layer status The shift key type defines a specific key such as the computer s Shift key or Ctrl key as the change layer key Layers are then changed only while that key is being pressed with the layer returning to Layer 0 when it is released Changing Layers using Software Software functions include the layer status read function and the layer setting function When the application switches to the specified layer the key data for the specified layer are input when the keys are pressed In this case management of the layers is all performed by the application and the current layer is maintained until the application changes layers Note Q Do not use the above 2 methods simultaneously Using them at the same time may cause differences between the key definition recognized by the application and the actual input Rev C Utilities 4 25 Layer Function Specifications Number of Layers 4 Layers Layers No 0 3 Number of Defined Data Maximum 63 data items per key per layer Default Layer Layer 0 wh
67. jumper setting JP7 JP18 on the mother board As the DCD signal is set to output in the default and the power supply is not output Refer to Chapter 1 Jumper Locations and Settings for the jumper setting ZN CAUTION 1 Making a mistake in setting the jumpers can damage the device or cause it fo heat up and possibly cause a fire Confirm that the jumper setting is correct before connecting the unit COMS COM6 Setting COM5 and COM6 cannot used as the default To use The BIOS setting must be changed by using the following procedure Refer to Chapter 5 BIOS Functions for the datails of the BIOS Q Note When setting the BIOS always connect the PS 2 keyboard It cannot be operated from the touchpanel 1 Connect the PS 2 keyboard to the IR 320 and turn on the power If you press Del during the POST the BIOS setup utility starts 2 Choose Integrated Peripherals and press Enter 3 Choose Onboard Serial Port 5and Onboard Serial Port 6 from the Integrated Peripherals menu and then set the I O address and the IRQ number 2 70 Setup Rev C Confidential Y Note For the I O address and the IRQ number make the other port the parallel port etc not to be used Disabled and then set the I O address and IRQ number IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 Press Esc to return to the main menu choose Save amp Exit Setup and press Enter The dialog is displayed input Y and press Enter 5 The system starts up a
68. key and Print Screen keys is handled specially by the system so these keys cannot be registered independently The Ctrl Alt Del Ctrl Esc Alf Esc and Alf Tab keys pressed simultaneously cannot be defined This utility cannot be run simultaneously with other key definition utilities such as 28keycfg exe Do not operate the mouse touch panel keyboard or other input device while this utility program is running while definition data are being written The file extension is L28 The format of this utility is not compatible with the file format of the previous 28 key definition utility Utilities 4 31 Starting The 28 key definition utility 28KYCFGL EXE is copied to the directory specified during installation The utility is copied to C Program Files 28 KB Config 4L if a directory is not specified This utility is started by either of the following two methods 3 Select 28KYCFGL EXE in Windows Explorer and run it T Select 28 KB Config Utilities 4L 28 KB Config Utility 4 Layers Supported in the Programs menu The following starting screen is displayed when the program starts Speed Buttons 28 Keyboard Config Utility 4L The speed buttons configured from 13 buttons are displayed under the title bar Clicking these speed buttons enables the desired function to be called up immediately Exit New Load Save 4 32 Utilities Closes the utility Clears the button s setting and creates a new se
69. key error messages Message Description Firmware version is not correct Firmware version error and others Invalid parameter Parameter error Communication error Communication error Invalid pathname Pathname error 28 Key Configuration Utility for MS DOS The 28 key configuration utility for MS DOS can define the keys and Shift keys on the 28 key keyboard unit connected to the IR 320 in MS DOS This program has been preinstalled in the following directory C Backup Keycfg DOS This program is stored on the floppy disk that comes with the 28 key keyboard unit and is installed on the hard disk by executing the install program Key definitions 21 characters maximum per key Number of definitions Shift Ctrl Alt Gray are each handled as one character Operation Keyboard mouse not available File 1 Designating a key definition file Load 2 Reading data from a key definition file Save 3 Writing data to a key definition file Edit 4 Editing a key definition file Functions Download 5 Writing defined keys to the keyboard See the table Definable keys on page 4 60 for the keys that can be defined Q Note Do not input from the keyboard while the defined keys are being written to the keyboard Start During installation the key definition utility for MS DOS POSKB28 EXE is copied into the specified directory If no directory is specified the utility is copied int
70. mode is designed for instances when start up is impossible because of overwriting of firmware and system variables The enforced boot can be performed only from an external keyboard The MSR 28 key keypad and similar devices cannot be used Country setting The country setting amends the default settings such as MSR readers K B settings and 28 key and 84 key default settings when the settings are initialized and during an enforced boot start up 1 16 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Functions of SW2 customer display connector SW2 If you want to loop back the DTR and the DSR of the customer display port set this switch to the 1 side This function might be needed when a system using a previous version of OPOS controls a TM printer without attaching a customer display Normally set this switch to the 0 side Functions of SW2 Customer display loop back jumper Dedicated TM reset 1 side Loop back DTR and DSR 0 side default Normally used LCD setting jumper switch The LCD setting jumper switch is located on the POS 320 board LCD setting jumper switch LCD jumper switch settings LCD setting jumper LCD units 1 2 DM LR104T 252 LR121SL LR121SV 2 3 DM LDM LR104T 052 Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 17 IR 320 Usage See the IR 320 User s Manual Dimensions Main Body
71. need to get software for CD R RW writing The software is not supplied by EPSON 3 6 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Windows 2000 Setup Procedure ZN CAUTION Be sure to keep the keyboard connected If necessary start the setup procedure after connecting the mouse The keyboard is necessary for inputting the product ID and password The keyboard is also necessary for user verification during logon to Windows 2000 even if the touch panel is in a usable state Windows 2000 is set up by using the following procedure 1 10 11 12 13 14 Rev C Turn on the system and boot the system from the pre installation HDD Windows 2000 setup will start The License Agreement screen is displayed Check the contents then select I accept this agreement and click Next The Regional Settings screen is displayed Make sure the system locale user locales and keyboard layout are set to United States then click Next The Personalize Your Software screen is displayed Input the Name and Organization then click Next The Your Product Key screen is displayed Input the product key entered on the cover of the First Step Guide in the COA Certificate of Authenticity package included with this product then click Next The Computer Name and Administrator Password screen is displayed Input the Computer Name and Administrator Password then click Next The Date and Time Settings screen is
72. or the Keyboard Firmware Setting utility for Windows and set the track to be read To make the JIS2 type card readable execute the following command PKMODE2 MSR 12J Commands Run the utility by typing the command in the following format PKMODE2 EXE MSR1 MSR3 MSR US JP FR GR SP CMDOFF CMDON TKOSS string TKOES string TK1SS string TK1ES string TK2SS string TK2ES string TK3SS string TK3ES string TKJSS string TKJES string BEEP ON BEEP OFF MSR m KEYTBL pathname TRACE TRON TROFF VAL xxh yyh PARA zzh Description of parameters MSR1 Prohibits decoding for Track 3 Set when the DM MR111 012 is mounted MSR3 Prohibits decoding for Track 1 Set when the DM MR111 013 is mounted MSR Sets the MSR unit decode to enable the 3 track decodes for Track 1 Track 2 and Track 3 Sets the DM MR123 when it is selected US Responds with the MSR data in the scan code of the English 101 key keyboard default value JP Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the Japanese 106 key keyboard FR Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the French 106 key keyboard GR Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the German 106 key keyboard SP Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the Spanish 106 key keyboard This country setting is effective also for the default key setting of the 28 key keyboard The specification of FR GR SP cannot be used for the
73. other foreign matter Doing so may cause a fire A Insert the power plug fully Failure to do so causes the power plug to heat up and may cause a fire LY Regularly remove the power plug from the outlet and clean the base of the prongs and between the prongs If you leave the power plug in the outlet for a long time dust may collect on the base of the prongs causing a short and fire Follow these steps to attach the power cable 1 Loosen the screws of the rear cover and remove the rear cover by pulling down the upper part of the rear cover 2 Connect the power cable to the IR 320 The power cable for the outlet can be connected also AC inlet AC outlet 3 Connect the power plug to the power outlet 4 Reattach the rear cover with the screw Rev C Setup 2 69 Confidential Installing Peripheral Devices to the COM Port The IR 320 has four serial ports COM1 COM2 COM5 COM6 Also it can output 5V or 12V at the 1st pin by the jumper setting JP7 JP18 on the mother board COM5 and COM6 can be used in the default setting Change the BIOS setting and assign COM5 and COM6 to the IRQ not being used Q Note COMS for the dedicated printer unit the customer display and COM4 for the touch panel cannot be used because they are set for the dedicated the IR 320 Q Note Do not use a serial mouse Setup Setting a Jumper It can output 5V or 12V power at the 1st pin of the serial connector by the
74. outlet that is close to devices that generate voltage fluctuations or electrical noise In particular stay clear of devices that use large electric motors The IR 320 and the POS system may not function correctly Always connect the power cable to the AC inlet of this product before plugging it into the wall outlet Be sure to push the plug of the power cable into the AC inlet of this product When the power cable for the TM printer is connected do not short circuit its connector pins Because pins are exposed this connector may lead to the short circuit when not connected to the TM printer Do not insert fingers or foreign matter into the CD ROM drive disk tray or the CD R RW drive disk tray or openings Doing so may lead to fire shock or injury Never hold up this product by the rear cover the CD ROM drive disk tray or the CD R RW drive disk tray or the front panel It may fall can cause damage or injury Make sure that the total power requirements of all devices receiving power from this product do not exceed the power limitation It may cause trouble Always use this product with the rear cover and the side cover attached If they are not attached foreign matter may enter this product and it may result in fire or improper operation Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual D When the protection circuit of the IR 320 operates such as in case of over current or when the temperature rises extraordinarily turn off the
75. paa aves dare ata Lia aN 1 17 RES20 Usa dis a do A al teks ta 1 18 DIMENSIONS 2 lt 5 A A A teas Secale Sed he hte A A a ia 1 18 Main Bod Yamada 2b ate a ei Metuchen 1 18 Peripheral Dimensions of the LCD 66 n nee es 1 19 Peripheral Dimensions of the Customer Display 6000 c cece ccc eee eens 1 20 Peripheral Dimensions of the Printer Tray 6 0 c cece cece eee eens 1 20 Dimensions When the Printer Unit is Mounted 0 0 ccc cect e eens 1 21 Chapter 2 Setup Overview of the Setup A E dois 2 1 Precatitions for Setting Up ita la A UR RR ES Tae eee we eS 2 2 Operations Before Setting Up the IR 320 cent een eens 2 3 Operation Testing Products iii a a dees es Pyle de oS 2 3 How to Install Options Peripheral Units 00 eens 2 4 Installing a DIMM Memory 2 cies ia hese toe Cea Se eee Sh Dae es oA ee ee 2 5 Removinigth DIMM viii oti Bee is tee ee et ee Ree a A Ra ea ink ede SR HERR 2 6 Installing a 2 5 HDD Unit OQLHDD iz nc ees ceeded dea ks deel mule ule Seve eb eta a a 2 7 1 Removing the HDD unit uri shpe ep o ok Soke ee ae be ee daa oe eee wea es 2 7 Installing a 3 5 HDD Unit OI HDD dnro i ri a eee nent eee nes 2 11 Rev C 1x Confidential Installing a CD ROM Drive CD R RW Drive OI R06 6 66 eens 2 17 Installing a Front CompactFlash Card Adapter OI RO7 2 0 0 2 ccc cee 2 21 Installing an PED Unit prar besiis 6648 A oot wee bask prin 2 24 PM ERPI Series asad
76. pressed BTTN The default setting is Instant Off The basic operations of BIOS are as follows Instant Off The power supply is turned off immediately when the Power button is pressed Delay 4 Sec If the Power button is pressed and held for less than 4 seconds 1 Shift to the Suspend mode if this operation is performed in the Full On mode 2 Shift to the Full On mode if this operation is performed in the Suspend mode If the Power button is pressed and held for at least 4 seconds 1 Shift to the Suspend mode once and the power supply is forcefully turned off after 4 seconds Disabled 1 Nothing happens when the Power button is pressed in the Full On mode 2 Recover to the Full On mode when the Power button is pressed in the Suspend mode 3 If the Power button is pressed and held for at least 4 seconds the power supply is forcefully turned off If the power is forcibly turned off by continuously pressing the power button for at least four seconds when Delay 4 Sec is set the Wake On LAN WOL function cannot be used next time the power is turned on In this case restart the system by using the power button and execute normal power off by using the OS The WOL function can then be used at next startup Wake Up by PCI Use this item to have the BIOS perform recovery from the Suspend mode to the Full On mode card using the signal from the PC card mounted in the PCI slot as well as to use the WOL function The default setting is Disabl
77. pressed the key definition is fixed and the Key Selection screen is displayed again When Shift Shift is pressed the inputted key definition is cancelled and the Key Selection screen is displayed again 4 The key top of the edited key is displayed in red 5 To exit the editing on the Key Selection screen press Esc Rev C Utilities 4 59 Download This key is used to actually write the defined key contents in the keyboard When Download is executed the key contents are written from 1 in order After writing is completed the following message is displayed Key map Download O K Press any key to Continue When any key is pressed the initial screen is displayed Quit This key is used to exit this utility For information on the definable keys see the table Definable keys below D The file name set at the File command is saved in K28_DL CFG as the key definition data when this utility is finished List of Definable Keys Following is a list of definable keys with the supplied utilities Yes means can be defined No means cannot be defined in the table below Definable keys Utility POSKB28 EXE OS DOS Language U S mode Keyboard 101 series Keys that cannot be defined Print Screen Scroll Lock Pause Num Lock Caps Lock Ctrl Alt Del depending on OS Shift Alt Ctrl Limits on key combinations Single Shift Ctrl Alt Esc Yes No No Yes Fn Fu
78. screws 2 Set the HDD jumper as shown in the below figure The jumper setting depends on the make and model of the HDD Set the jumper for your HDD 3 Connect the two cables to their connectors Rev C Setup 2 15 Confidential 3 Installing the HDD unit 1 Slide the HDD unit into the IR 320 from the front being careful not to subject it to shock or vibration and be sure the cables are not pinched Confirm that the projection on the mounting plate under the HDD is firmly engaged with the frame projection on the IR 320 projection on the HDE mounting plate frame projection 2 16 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 3 Lock the HDD unit with two screws 4 Reattach the HDD cover 5 Insert the removed PCI card 6 Reattach the side panel with two screws 7 Reattach the side cover 8 Close the front cover 9 Turn on the IR 320 start up the BIOS setup and confirm that the HDD is identified normally For information on the BIOS setup see Chapter 5 BIOS Functions Installing a CD ROM Drive CD R RW Drive OI R06 The optional 24x CD ROM drive OI R06 or CD R RW drive OI R06 202 is installed using the following procedure Q Note The CD R RW drive can write but you must prepare the application to write Rev C Setup 2 17 Confidential ZN CAUTION Because the CD ROM CD R RW drive is a precision instrument do not subject it to even the slightest
79. setting 2E8 IRQ10 setting 338 IRQ11 setting 238 IRQ10 setting and Disabled setting Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration Onboard Serial This setting enables disables serial controller 5 6 combination of the I O address and IRQ Port 5 6 Serial resource for serial port 1 inside the S I O W83697UF Port 5 6 Use IRA The default setting is Disabled There are options of Onboard Serial Port 5 6 the 3F8 setting 2F8 setting 3E8 setting 3E8 setting 338 setting 238 setting and Disabled setting There are options of Serial Port 5 6 Use IRQ the IRQ3 setting IRQ4 setting IRQ5 setting IRQ7 setting IRQ10 setting IRQ11 setting IRQ14 setting and IRQ15 setting Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration Onboard This setting enables disables the parallel controller combination of the I O address and IRQ Parallel Port resource for the parallel port inside the S 1 O W83627F The default setting is 378 IRQ7 There are 4 options the Disabled setting 378 IRQ7 setting 278 IRQ5 setting and the 3BC IRQ7 setting When using the Disabled setting system resources can be opened and the port can be used with other devices Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration Note that since an 8 byte continuous I O space is needed when setting the parallel port mode to EPP the 3BC IRQ7 settin
80. side main power switch and leave it off about 10 minutes after solving the problem then turn on the side switch and the front power switch in order again Q Note J Be sure to use EPSON supplied or specified DIMMs HDDs and CPUs LY If you install a board in the PCI slot use one that was confirmed by EPSON Contact your EPSON dealer for a list of approved devices If you use any other device please consider that it is your responsibility to choose the correct device Q When installing an application find out from the dealer where you bought it whether it is appropriate About This Manual Aim of the Manual This manual was created to provide information on the IR 320 for anyone who is developing applications Contents of the Manual The table below is just a summary A complete table of contents appears at the end of this section See it for detailed information and page numbers The configuration of the manual is as follows Chapter 1 IR 320 System Overview Describes the hardware configuration the software configuration the jumper position and others Chapter 2 Setup Describes how to set up the IR 320 and its options Chapter 3 OS Information Describes the preinstalled OS Windows 2000 NT 98 95 MS DOS and the configurations and setups of various drivers Chapter 4 Utilities Describes each utility and how to set them up Chapter 5 BIOS setup Describes the BIOS setup Chapte
81. the DIMM check the connection part to confirm that no problem exists and then insert it again The DIMM is installed by using the following procedure 1 Slide the right side cover down until it comes off 2 Remove the two screws from the side panel and remove the side panel by pulling it out while lifting it Rev C Setup 2 5 Confidential 3 Match the two notches in the DIMM to the projections on the socket and push the DIMM until it clicks and stands upright Y Note When two DIMMs are installed use the farthest socket first 4 Reattach the side panel with two screws 5 Reattach the side cover Removing the DIMM To remove the DIMM unlock the lock pins located on both sides of the DIMM socket and pull the DIMM straight up 2 6 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installing a 2 5 HDD Unit Ol HDD The IR 320 has one or two 2 5 HDDs or one 3 5 HDD according to its specifications Up to two 2 5 HDDs can be installed For information on installing the 3 5 HDD unit OI HDD see the following section Installing a3 5 HDD Unit OI HDD To install a 2 5 HDD remove the HDD unit currently installed in the IR 320 install the optional HDD and reinstall original the HDD unit in the IR 320 Install the optional HDD using the following procedure ZN CAUTION Do not subject the HDD unit to shock or vibration Because the HDD unit is a precision instrument
82. the IR 320 are on in the standby state To save the backup data after the power is off the main power switch should remain on When the system is in the soft off mode it can be put in full on mode by software by pressing the soft off switch by a wake up signal from the LAN or by a ring signal from the modem 3 Full On Mode In the full on mode the main power switch and the soft power switch are on The system is in the normal operating state Even if the system is started by a wake up request signal from the LAN the full on mode is produced To turn off the IR 320 power turn the power off from the software The power off operation differs slightly depending on the setting of the APM driver See Chapter 4 Utility 4 Video Off Mode When no input operation is performed for a given period of time during operation in the full on mode only the LCD and the backlight circuits are turned off thus extending the service lifetime for the LCD peripheral parts Depending on which operating system OS is used the setup method for the time for transfer to the video off mode differs The setup method for each OS is described below Windows NT does not support the video off mode therefore the LCD and the backlight circuits cannot be turned off during operation Type of OS Setup method for time of transfer to video off mode Windows XP Set by Power Options property Turn off monitor Windows 2000 Set by Power Option
83. the POS application software itself had to be replaced For this reason it was impossible to make the PC POS fully open in terms of both the hardware and software To solve this problem the device control object was modularized and made to be independent of the POS application software Because only the device control object needs replacement at this time the work to replace the POS application software itself when the device was replaced is simplified Also because the original device control object is supplied the POS application 4 52 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual software developers no longer need the detailed expertise of each manufacturer s device or the standardization of the entire system and the hardware as well as the software This reduces the load of developing work Software Standardization When a device control object is created it is necessary to choose the interface API between the POS application software and the device control module EPSON has joined an industrywide and worldwide effort to standardize and spread the use of APIs The standardized software uses an OCX driver which is modularized software divided into two levels the Control Object CO and the Service Object SO A separate CO exists for each class of device while a separate SO exists for each individual device for example software that uses a TM U950 needs a general POS printer CO and a specific TM U950 SO If the TM U950
84. the lock knob under the 84 key keyboard to the lock position 2 36 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 10 Install the printer unit or the printer tray and lock it with two screws 11 Reattach the side cover Removing an 84 Key Keyboard Unit 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector printer cable Rev C Setup 2 37 Confidential 4 Remove one cable for the 84 key keyboard from the connector as shown below 6 Slide the 84 key keyboard until it hits the upper limit of the slide range Slightly pull the part circled in the illustration below in the direction of the arrow and slide the LCD unit upward further on the back side 2 38 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Adjust the position of the 84 key keyboard while watching the hole shown in the figure so that the tabs on the main body can be disengaged from the grooves in the 84 key keyboard Pull the 84 key keyboard out t Installing a Battery Unit Ol RO3 The nickel cadmium battery unit OI R03 backs up operations automatically if the power turns off abruptly such as in the case of a power interruption The specifications for the battery unit are as follows
85. the repeat conditions The default setting is Disabled Disabled This setting is used when the apparatus is to be used at a fixed setting without changing the number of repetitions or the intervals between repetitions For the fixed setting a repetition occurs once every 6 seconds with intervals of 250 msec This is the normal setting Enabled This setting is used when the number of repetitions and the intervals between repetitions is changed For details refer to Typematic Rate Chars Sec and Typematic Delay Msec Typematic Rate This setting is used by to determine how many times an entry is made in a one second period Chars Sec when a key is held down The fixed setting is 6 times per second Additional settings are 8 10 12 15 20 24 and 30 Typematic This setting is used to set the number of Msec for the intervals between data when a key is held Delay down The fixed setting is 250 Msec Additional settings are 500 750 and 1000 Msec Security Option Sets the password entry timing The default setting is Setup The password is set in Main Menu Set Supervisor Password and Main Menu Set User Password If a password is not set in these items this setting will have no significance The relationships between this setting and the password set are as follows Setup Setting System Setting When starting the OS User Password or Supervisor Password When changing BIOS Setup Supervis
86. the screen input the necessary items and continue installing The Registration dialog box is displayed Input the 10 digit CD key shown on the COA Certificate of Authenticity Select Next to begin setup According to the instructions on the screen input the necessary items and continue installing According to the instructions on the screen set up the date time and the display When installing is completed according to the instructions on the screen take the Windows NT CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive and then click Restart Computer to reboot the system The desktop screen of Windows NT is displayed ZN CAUTION Setup is executed with the VGA display Installing the Network Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Rev C Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Winnt Network PRONT4 EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next The Location to Save Files dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C IntelPRO Open the Control Panel and select Network A dialog box is displayed Click Yes The Network Setup Wizard starts Check the Wired to the Network check box and click Next Click Select from list Click Have Disk The Insert Disk dialog box is displayed Input the directory specified by step 3 and click OK Th
87. to BIOS boot up are as follows Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Virus Warning Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled External Cache Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled CPU L2 Cache ECC Disabled Enabled Enabled Checking Enabled Quick Post Disabled Disabled Disabled Quick Power On Self Test Disabled Enabled Enabled First Boot Device Floppy Floppy Floppy LAN Disabled Second Boot Device Floppy HDD 0 HDD 0 15120 HDD 0 CSI DROM DD 1 DD 2 DD 3 P100 LAN Disabled n MELIE Third Boot Device Floppy SCSI SCSI LS120 DD 0 CSI DROM DD 1 DD 2 DD 3 P100 LAN Disabled NX NT TE Boot Other Device Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Boot Up NumLock Status Off Off Off On Rev C 5 21 BIOS Functions Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Gate A20 Option Normal Fast Normal Fast Typematic Rate Setting Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Typematic Rate Chars Sec 6 8 10 12 15 20 24 30 Typematic Delay Msec 250 500 750 1000 250 250 Security Option Setup System Setup Setup OS Select For DRAM gt 64MB Non OS2 OS2 Non OS2 Non OS2 HDD S M A R T Capability Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Report No FDD For WIN 95 No Yes No No C8000 CBFFF Shad
88. to Save Files dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C IntelPRO When copying of the file is completed the Complete dialog box is displayed Click Install now 3 28 OS and Drivers Rev C 5 IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual The Complete dialog box is displayed Click Finish Uninstalling the network driver To uninstall the Network Driver using the following procedure 1 2 3 Open the Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when Intel R PRO Ethernet Adapter and Software is selected Click Change Remove The Intel R PRO Adapters and Software Uninstaller dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the Touch Panel Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start WinXP Touch EPSTPWDM EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C Program Files EPSON TouchPanel The Hardware Installation dialog box is displayed Click Continue Anyway The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected a
89. unit while watching the hole shown in the illustration below so that the tabs of the main body can be disengaged from the grooves in the LCD unit Remove the LCD unit in the direction of arrow 4 2 34 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installing an 84 Key Keyboard Unit DM KR084 The 84 key keyboard can be installed instead of the LCD unit The 84 key keyboard is installed by using the following procedure 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector 4 Set the lock knob under the 84 key keyboard to the release position Rev C Setup 2 35 Confidential 5 Thread one cable of the 84 key keyboard through the hole in the center of the IR 320 6 Engage the right and left grooves on the back of the keyboard with the right and left tabs on the IR 320 When both sides are engaged slide the LCD unit down on the back for installation groove of the 84 key tab on the IR 320 q keyboard 7 Connect the 38 pin connector cable for the 84 key keyboard to connector CN31 layout of the connectors CN51 CN31 38 pin CN35 34 pin JPi Jumper Switch POS board 8 Set the Jumper Switch JP1 to 1 2 9 Return
90. use this code and it becomes selected Clicking it again cancels the selection 2 Click Code and open the KeyCode dialog box 3 Input the code for the selected key from the keyboard This code can be up to a maximum of 63 bytes 4 If you click OK the setting becomes valid and the key dialog box is closed If you click Cancel the setting is canceled If you click Reset the code is cleared Setting the Key Label Use the following steps to set the key label displayed on the key position button 1 Click the key you want to label and it becomes selected 2 If Label is clicked the KeyLabel dialog box is opened 3 Input any characters as the label 4 If you click OK the input characters are displayed on the button and the KeyLabel dialog box closes If you click Cancel the input characters are canceled Up to 20 characters can be input is regarded as a new line 4 14 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Key Program To assign a setting to an actual key you need to run the program Run the program by either of the following methods T Click Prog One while a button is selected Only the selected key is programmed LY Click Prog All All the keys are programmed If the program ends correctly the following dialog box is displayed Saving the Settings Save the current settings as a file with the following steps 1 If you click Save the Save As dialog box is display
91. used for recovering Windows 2000 Use the HDD included in the shipment or an unused HDD for OS recovery The external keyboard is necessary for the recovery After restoring the OS a product ID must be entered at the setup of Windows The product ID is on the first step guide cover in the COA Certificate of Authenticity package attached to the system Set the BIOS setting to Optimized Defaults When using the BIOS setting customized note down the BIOS setting value beforehand After the recovery is done you must reset it to that value OS recovery erases all contents of the HDD Back up the necessary data to a floppy disk or other media Recovering method Follow the steps below to carry out OS recovery 1 2 Rev C Turn power to the IR 320 off Turn the main power switch off Unplug the power cable If a CD ROM drive is not already installed attach a drive to the IR 320 Attach to the IR 320 the HDD unit you d like to recover Connect the external keyboard to the IR 320 keyboard mouse connector Start up the BIOS setup utility and select the Boot Sequence option from the BIOS features setup menu Refer to Chapter 4 for the operating procedure of the BIOS setup utility Select the First Boot Device from the Advanced BIOS Features setup menu and set the First Boot Device to CDROM Insert the Windows 2000 CD ROM 1 into the CD ROM drive On the BIOS setup utility main menu select Save a
92. utilities are included with the front CF adapter OI R07 option While operating the system the CompactFlash card can be attached or removed Utility Bay Swap OS Windows NT Page 4 78 A Tool for Software Development This tool is the development tool to facilitate the development of POS applications by standardizing the control system of the POS peripheral devices Utility EPSON OPOS ADK OS Windows 2000 NT 98 95 Page 4 52 Rev C Utilities 4 3 How to Obtain Each Utility The procedure for obtaining each utility is as follows For more information about the installation procedure of each utility refer to the item describing each utility Utility Keyboard firmware setting utility for Windows Key Lock setting utility for Windows 28 key definition Utility for Windows 84 key definition Utility for Windows Definition data automatic setting utility for Windows How to obtain it They are preinstalled in the BACKUP KEYCFG WIN DISK1 folder They can be used by running Setup Keyboard firmware setting utility for MS DOS 28 key definition utility for MS DOS 84 key definition utility for MS DOS Definition data automatic setting utility for MS DOS They are preinstalled in the BACKUP KEYCFG DOS folder They can be used by running Setup Layer supported 28 key definition utility Layer supported 28 key automatic
93. version of the MAC address and keyboard firmware are confirmed SelectM B Information from the setup pull down menu and the dialog box appears The information relative the mainboard can be confirmed e Type of the CPU and the clock speed e The memory capacity e The setup property of video Enable Disable e The setup property of sound Enable Disable e The setup property of Ethernet and ROM Enable Disable The information for Ethernet Identification e The BIOS version information e The Keyboard Firmware version information Device Test Menu Each device can be tested from the Device Test menu Executable device tests are as follows Q TM print test The following tests are executed in the TM print test Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 11 Confidential e Print test on receipt paper standard print pattern e Autocutter test for the autocutter equipped printer only When the test is completed the message TM print test done is displayed in the message area Make sure that the print pattern has been printed For the autocutter equipped printer make sure that the receipt paper has been cut by the autocutter If the TM status is Disable or No communication this test is not executed 1 DM display test Sends the following messages to the DM display Display Module Test x Device Diagnostics Check the screen of the customer display to make sure that the test has been executed When any key is pre
94. you click the Reset button the code is cleared Setting the Key Label Use the following steps to label the keytop 1 2 Rev C Click the key you want to label and it becomes selected If you click the Label button the key label dialog is opened Input any characters as the label If you click the OK button the input characters are displayed on the button and the key label dialog closes If you click the Cancel button the input characters are canceled Up to 20 characters can be input is regarded as a new line Utilities 4 45 Keytop Color Settings Use the following steps to set the color of the keytop 1 Click the key you want to color and it becomes selected 2 If you click the Color button the color setting dialog is displayed 3 Set the color of the keytop The color setting dialog uses the standard Windows function For details see the Windows manual 4 If you click OK the key is redrawn in the selected color and the color setting dialog closes If you click the Cancel button the selected color is canceled Key Program To assign a setting to an actual key you must run this program You can run the program using either of the following methods T Click the Prog One button while the button is selected Only the selected key is programmed LY Click the Prog All button All the keys are programmed If the program ends correctly the following is displayed 84keyCfe Q m
95. 33 Linking with Keys When a key is selected if the key to the right or directly below that key is selected while the Shift key is pressed those two keys are linked By repeating this operation multiple keys can be linked enabling the creation of a large key When a linked key is selected if the selected key is selected again while the Shift key is pressed the link is cancelled Defining Change Layer Keys Define change layer keys by the following procedure 1 Click the Option button to open the Option dialog box 2 The change layer keys for each respective layer 1 to 3 can be set in the 3 drop down lists in the dialog box Select the number of the key that is to be used as the change layer key from the drop down list The change layer key is not set if is selected Note A The key set as the change layer key cannot be used for code input or by itself in programming Setting Key Labels Set the key labels displayed on the keytops by the following procedure 1 Select the key that the key label is to be set for 2 The Label dialog box opens when the Label button is clicked 4 34 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 3 Input the desired characters 4 Clicking the OK button displays the input characters on the keytop and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button discards the input characters Up to 20 characters can be input A is regarded as the starting point of a new line If the
96. 4 2 35 nstalling a Battery Unit OI RO3 2 39 nstalling a 28 Key Keyboard Unit DM K028 2 43 nstalling the MSR Unit DM MR123 2 48 nstalling a Printer Tray 2 52 nstalling a Printer 2 54 nstalling a PCI Board 2 60 nstalling a Customer Display 2 62 nstalling a Mouse Keyboard 2 67 nstalling a Cash Drawer 2 68 Attaching a Power Cable 2 69 1 The 2 5 HDD unit OI HDD and the 3 5 HDD unit OI HDD cannot be installed together 2 The CD ROM drive OI RO6 and the front CompactFlash adapter OIl RO7 cannot be installed together 2 4 Setup Y Note Don t use a serial mouse Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installing a DIMM Memory DIMMs memory are installed in the DIMM sockets on the main board One 128MB DIMM is standard on the IR 320 Two DIMM sockets 168 pin type which can increase the memory to 512MB are available Remove the DIMM originally installed and install the two DIMMs instead ZN CAUTION a Static electricity can damage the components of the IR 320 Before you touch any components touch a grounded metal surface to discharge the static electricity in your body It is also recommended that you wear a grounded wristband and work on an antistatic surface 1 Do not touch the DIMM connectors Dirt may cause a malfunction A fit is difficult to insert the DIMM do not apply excessive force to the DIMM If excessive force is used the connection parts may be damaged Remove
97. A message that the copying is over is displayed Then exit MS DOS Prompt A Saving the HD image data Save all data under the C backup recovery data directory onto another medium or drive Example 1 Connect the IR 320 in network to a PC that can write data onto CD Rs 2 Save all data under the C backup recovery data directory of the IR 320 onto the PC 3 Write all data saved in step 2 onto a CD R 4 After saving the data the directory under the C backup recovery directory may be deleted 0 Backing up each driver Each directory under the C backup directory is the backup of each driver which can be backed up through individual saving Recovering method 1 Editing the start up disk Edit CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXE BAT created in Preparing a Recovery Medium to the device on which the image data has been saved UU Recovering 1 Connect the medium or drive onto which the data has been saved in Preparing a Recovery Medium to the IR 320 Start the system by using the start up floppy disk created in Preparing a Recovery Medium 3 24 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 3 Enter the following from the command prompt x Drive with the image file After that the OS recovery starts A gt x Enter start Enter 4 The following message appears Select and enter the partition size of the HDD Please select the system partition size 1 10GB Default size
98. Auto ESCD Always use the default setting RQ Resources Sets the handling of IRQ Resources interrupt number You can change IRQ Resources 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 14 and 15 The default setting is PCI ISA PnP for each resource PCI ISA PnP The target IRQ resources are allocated automatically dynamic allocation by PnP BIOS as is the case when the Resource Controlled By setting is set to Auto ESCD Legacy ISA The target IRQ resources are reserved static allocation and are not affected by the PnP BIOS automatic dynamic allocation When making changes be careful not to create a resource conflict DMA Resources Sets the handling of DMA resources DMA channels You can change DMA Resources 0 1 3 5 6 and 7 The default setting is PCI ISA PnP for each resource PCI ISA PnP The target DMA resources are allocated automatically dynamic allocation by PnP BIOS as is the case when the Resource Controlled By setting is set to Auto ESCD Legacy ISA The target IRQ resources are reserved static allocation and are not affected by the PnP BIOS automatic dynamic allocation When making changes be careful not to create a resource conflict Memory Base Memory Use this setting to position the Upper Memory Block UMB in the expansion memory range Resources The normal setting is default setting Reserved Sets the position address The default setting is N A indicating that no position is
99. B as a system area For a hard disk of more than 10 GB the excess area other than the system area is not yet formatted Use the FDISK and FORMAT command when creating a drive in the unused area The start up drive has been formatted to the following file system e File system FAT32 e Volume label Windows 98 Pre installed software m C C O O O A e O Rev C Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition Intel Chipset software installation utility Intel Video driver Intel Network driver Analog Devices Sound driver EPSON Touch Panel Driver EPSON DM MS Series setup utility 1 EPSON CD ROM driver 2 EPSON Logon tool 1 OS and Drivers 3 21 EPSON Power button prohibited setting tool 1 1 EPSON AC line tool 1 Y Note 1 These are not installed during the auto installation procedure 2 The driver to use for OS recovery for DOS Version of the pre installation HDD To confirm the version of the HDD see HDVER TAG in the start up drive root This file is text formatted and can be read using Notepad or a similar text editor The contents of HDVER TAG are as follows HD Information MODEL IR 320 OS Windows98 LANG English VER 1 Directory Configuration The root directory of the HDD is structured as follows Program Files Application for the standard installation of Windows 98 Backup Keycfg A Backup of MSR Utility Win Disk1 Backup of MSR Utility for Win
100. Boot Device Third Boot Device and Boot Other Device set the floppy disk which a system disk is installed in a CD ROM or the other device and then press Enter Press Esc to skip memory test The user may press Esc to skip the full memory test Floppy disk s fail Cannot find or initialize the floppy drive controller or the floppy drive Check the FDD or the connection whether or not there is an error in the FDD setting of the BIOS HARD DISK S FAIL Cannot find or initialize the hard drive controller or the hard drive This message is displayed when the sector verify error occurs while accessing the hard disk PRESS F1 TO DISABLE NMI F2 TO REBOOT A Non Maskable Interrupt NMI occurs during POST Press F1 to clear the MNI and then continue with POST and press F2 to reboot BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual POST processing message The BIOS displays the message of the POST processing while POST Power On Self Test These messages are displayed until the operation system is booted When the following message is displayed input according to the message So another processing is done Table 5 9 POST processing messages Message Description Press DEL to enter SETUP ESC to This message is displayed in the lower left of the screen Press ESC to omit the skip memory test full memory test Press DEL to start POST again Press DEL to enter SETUP
101. Center check box is checked the displayed input characters are arranged around the center of the keytop Setting the Keytop Color Set the keytop color by the following procedure 1 Select the key that the color is to be set for and activate it 2 Clicking the Color button displays the color dialog box Basic colors El TS Mir Mi mE mana eee i pmi E7 ioe E E E i A E M Custom colors BEE Ee eee es BEEBE eee Define Custom Colors gt gt Cancel 3 Set the keytop color Select the color to be se from the color palette 4 Clicking the OK button causes the key to be redrawn in the selected color and closes the Color dialog box Clicking the Cancel button discards the selected color Setting the Font Set the font by the following procedure 1 Select the key that the font is to be set for and activate it Rev C Utilities 4 35 2 Clicking the Font button displays the Font dialog box Courier T Courier New ixedsys Marlett odem MS Sans Serif 3 Set the font 4 Clicking the OK button sets the selected font Clicking the Cancel button discards the selected font Programming Keys To assign settings to the actual keys it is necessary to program them Program the keys by either of the following methods 3 While a key is in the selected state click the Prog One button Only the selected key is programmed 3 Click the Prog All button All the keys are programmed The following dialog
102. Controller and Yes under Advanced BIOS Features Report No FDD For WIN 95 When using this setting or the Disabled setting for the FDC be sure to change to the Halt On setting 360K 5 25 in A 5 25 inch drive cannot be loaded on this device so 5 25 cannot be selected as a setting 1 2M 5 25 in A 5 25 inch drive cannot be loaded on this device so 5 25 cannot be selected as a setting 720K 3 5 in The fixes the floppy drive Read Write to 720KB Please note that since a 720KB Read Write floppy disk can also be used for a standard equipped Read Write floppy disk set at 3 5 inch and 1 44M there is very little value in using this setting 1 44M 3 5 in This is the normal setting This is the desired setting for both the default setting and the Fail Safe Optimized 2 88M 3 5 in The standard FDD is not compatible with 2 88MB so this setting cannot be used Halt On Sets the system stop conditions for startup POST The definitions for each of the settings are as follows All Errors Use this setting to stop the system when an error occurs No Errors Use this setting to disregard the occurrence of errors and continue the startup process All But Keyboard Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs with the exception of keyboard related errors This is the default setting for both Fail Safe Optimized But Diskette Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs with the exception of floppy di
103. D Information MODEL IR 320 OS Windows2000 LANG Dut ch English French German Italian Portuguese Spanish VER 1 Directory Configuration The root directory of the HDD is structured as follows Backup Keycfg Win a Disk1 DOS Chipset Dissw Epsbatt Epserial Logon Network Sound Touch Video Recovery Bootfd Data Bootdisk E Documents and Settings 1386 Mui Program Files WINNT Backup of MSR Utility Backup of MSR Utility for Windows Backup of MSR Utility for MS DOS Chipset driver backup folder Power button prohibited setting tool backup folder AC line tool backup folder EPSON Serial driver backup folder Logon tool backup folder Network driver backup folder Sound driver backup folder Touch Panel driver backup folder Video driver backup folder Recovery folder Folder for files used to create an ordinary boot floppy disk Folder for saving text and settings Setup file folder Windows utility folders Windows folders The 1386 directory may be deleted after the addition of the Windows 2000 application and the addition change of the driver The directories under the Backup directory are the backups for drivers and utilities Each of these directories can be backed up into CD R or other media After being backed up these directories may be deleted If you install the optional CD R RW drive you
104. Drivers 3 27 20 21 22 23 24 The Date and Time Settings dialog box is displayed Confirm the setting and click Next The system reboots automatically The Welcome to Microsoft Windows dialog box is displayed Click Next The Who will use this computer dialog box is displayed Input the user name according to the instruction on the screen The Thank you dialog box is displayed Click Finish Windows XP will start ZN CAUTION Setup is executed with the VGA display Installing the Intel Chipset Diver Y Note The Chipset Driver must be installed before you install other drivers This is installed by the exclusive installation program l 4 5 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start WinXP Chipset infinst_enu EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome screen is displayed Click Next The License Agreement screen is displayed Click Yes The Readme Information dialog box is displayed Click Next Complete dialog box is displayed Click Finish Uninstalling the Intel chipset driver Uninstalling cannot be done Installing the Network Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start WinXP Network pro2kxpm exe The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next The Location
105. E EARS tas OA BALERS 3 31 Installing the Intel Chipset Diver 06 c ccc een E E E 3 34 Installing the Network Driver ooo ois des Se Poin e ALG Se ee eee areata 3 34 Installing th Sound Driver arer A E EAE A UR be Pod gs ote Meee 3 35 Installing the Touch Panel Driver ooocooooccccococnncnrr rr 3 36 Setting the recognition range of the double click 0c ccc eects 3 36 Installing the Serial Port Driver 0 6 6 n ne ees 3 37 Installing the AC line tool so 252 S368 A Re ee RE Pe eed a lt 3 37 Power button prohibited setting tool for windows 2000 6 cece eee eee eee es 3 38 Installation for Windows NT Locally Procured Edition 6 00 c ccc eee een ees 3 40 Installation Procedure s sc sos 5 gsc A re Ha A a a caw OR de de 3 40 Installing the Network Driver 0 2 anoue deniad Ape nc 3 41 Installing S rvice Pack 6a vcd id ae EG ee Gee I Ss eae 3 42 Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD accord etd se Dhue slate ae weiss dea 3 42 Installing th Video DIVER seek es 3 43 Installing the Sound Driver ss seser rara alada ile dias aloe aia anh ba 3 44 Installing the Touch Panel Driver ciao okie bbe ieee tage bing ad eed 3 44 Installation for Windows 98 Locally Procured Edition 6 cece eee eee rr 3 46 Installation Procedure os ii oa Regd aero AAA pe RN ORY EN A Behe es 3 46 Setup Procedure se cc e iaa wed maak ga weal Sas pi tages ERT Spies a phases 3 47 Installing the Chipset Driver for Intel
106. ECC check This is the normal setting Disabled This setting is used when the ECC check is not performed Quick Post Sets POST processing conditions The default setting Quiet Post is set as Disabled Enabled This setting is used to perform the memory test when rebooting after resetting the software or when auto detection of the IDE device is omitted This makes it possible to reduce the time required for rebooting via software reset Disabled This setting is used to perform the memory test when rebooting after resetting the software or when auto detection of the IDE device is not omitted Quick Power On Sets POST processing conditions The default setting Quick Power On Self Test is set as Self Test Enabled Enabled This setting is used to execute the POST processing memory self diagnostic test only once during startup This setting can be used to reduce the time required for startup Disabled This setting is used to execute the POST processing memory self diagnostic test several times during startup The ESC key may be pressed during POST to skip the processing First Boot Device This setting sets the search order for the startup device The search is performed in the order of First gt Second gt Third device and starts up from the first device that is capable of performing Second Boot the startup one that has a boot sector and that can be loaded with IPL Device For both the default setting and F
107. Enabled Characters CardEnd Track1Start lt gt are characters and can be input Track1End Input the hexadecimal as Inn within a range from 01h to 7Fh Track2Start rom OLN TOCAN Track2End Effective up to 7 characters The 8th character and those thereafter are neglected Track3Start Track3End Because even the line feed character is TACK EN effective do not carelessly input a space or a JIS2Start tab JIS2End CodeDefinition00 See Code Conversion Entry on page 4 71 for further details When nothing is described after the entry the entry setting is deleted For Sysparam00 and CodeDefinition00 set numeric numbers in a range from 00 to 99 Set the numeric values one by one in ascending order Do not input the same numeric value for more than one The default setting U S mode is described as follows General Version PKL100 IgnoreCommands 0OFff MSR ValidTracks 1 2 3 Beep On CodeType US CardStart CardEnd Track1Start TracklEnd Track2Start Track2End Track3Start Track3End 4 70 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Code Conversion Entry CodeDefinitionNN Character Code Key Number Shift Mode CodeDefinitionNN Specifies the character code to be defined c defines whether a character or numeral has been specified Example A 0x41 65 Character Code Sets values between 01h and 7Fh Key Number Specifies the key numbers shown in th
108. F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 3E8 IRQ4 2E8 IRQ3 3F8 IRQ11 2F8 IRQ10 3E8 IRQ11 2E8 IRQ10 338 IRQ11 238 IRQ10 Disabled 3F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 3E8 IRQ4 2E8 IRQ3 3F8 IRQ11 2F8 IRQ10 3E8 IRQ11 2E8 IRQ10 338 IRQ11 238 IRQ10 3F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 3F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 Onboard Serial Port 3 Disabled 3F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 3E8 IRQ4 2E8 IRQ3 3F8 IRQ11 2F8 IRQ10 3E8 IRQ11 2E8 IRQ10 338 IRQ11 238 IRQ10 3E8 IRQ11 3E8 IRQ1 1 Onboard Serial Port 4 Disabled 3F8 IRQ4 2F8 IRQ3 3E8 IRQ4 2E8 IRQ3 3F8 IRQ1 1 2F8 IRQ10 3E8 IRQ11 2E8 IRQ10 338 IRQ11 238 IRQ10 2E8 IRQ10 2E8 IRQ10 Rev C 5 25 BIOS Functions Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Onboard Serial Port 5 Disabled 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 338 238 Disabled Disabled Serial Port 5 Use IRQ ROS RQA RQS RQ7 RQ10 RQ11 RQ14 RQ15 IRQ7 IRQ7 Onboard Serial Port 6 Disabled 3F8H 2F8H 3E8H 2E8H 338H 238H Disabled Disabled Serial Port 6 Use IRQ ROS RQA RQS RQ7 RQ10 RQ11 RQ14 RQ15 IRQS IRQS Onboard Parallel Port Disabled 378 IRQ7 278 IRQ5 3BC IRQ7 378 IRQ7 378 IRQ7 Parallel Port Mode Normal EPP ECP ECP EPP Normal Normal EPP Mode Select EPP1 9 EPP1 7 EPP1 9 EPP1 7 ECP Mode Use DMA 3 Notes The Serial Port 5 Use IRQ con be selected if setting The IRQ resource is not assigned in Disab he
109. FFERS 10 3 56 OS and Drivers Rev C 8 9 IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Add the following description to the AUTOEXEC BAT of MS DOS with a text editor and save it The following is the example of the having the driver file in the CANWCLIENTA directory In case of having it in the other directory describe as CD the directory name CD NWCLIENT LSL E100BODI IPXODI NETX Turn off the IR 320 and connect it to the network Turn on the IR 320 and restart MS DOS Installing the Touch Panel Driver 1 2 3 Turn on the IR 320 and start MS DOS Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Copy Dos62 Touch CALDSTD EXE and MEDSTD COM in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 to the optional directory in the hard disk For example copy it on C Touch directory Executing Touch Panel Driver Enter the following from the prompt to install the driver medstd Ixx Pxxxx Bxx Fxxxx Dx S The meaning of these parameters are as follows Ixx IRQ number Default 10 Pxxxx Port address Default 2E8 Bxx Baudrate Default 9600 Fxxxx Frequency of Beep Default 3E8 Dx Time of Beep 25ms x X S Graphic mode You need parameter S Text mode You don t need parameter S lt Example gt medstd 110 P2E8 B96 F3E8 D2 S Setting of Touch Panel Driver Touch Panel Driver for Windows Calibrating the Touch Panel The touch panel calibration refers to the settin
110. FOh Coprocessor error NO 82801BA 170h to 177h Hard disk controller secondary NO 82801BA 1FOh to 1F7h Hard disk controller primary NO 82801BA 220h to 22Fh Sound Blaster YES 82801BA 240h to 24Fh 2E8h to 2Efh Serial port 4 YES W83627F 2F8h to 2FFh Serial port 2 YES W83627F 376h Hard disk controller secondary NO 82801BA 378h to 37Fh Parallel port 1 YES W83627F 400h can be used when in the ECP mode 388h to 38Bh FM synthesizer when a sound board is mounted NO 82801BA 3BOh to 3DFh VGA register NO 82810E2 3E8h to 3EFh Serial port 3 YES W83627F 3FOh to 3F7h Floppy disk controller excluding 3F6h NO W83627F 3F6h Hard disk controller primary NO 82801BA 3F8h to 3FFh Serial port 1 YES W83627F A4DOh to 4D1h Interruption edge level control NO 82801BA CF8h to CFFh PCI configuration register DWORD NO 82810E2 CF9h Reset control byte NO 82801BA 4000 4037h Power Management I O Register NO 82801BA 5000 5000Ch SMBUS I O register NO 82801BA Rev C Hardware Specifications 7 3 DMA The IR 320 connects two 8237A equivalent DMA controllers to support seven DMA channels Channels 0 1 2 and 3 provide 8 bit data transfers channels 5 6 and 7 provide 16 bit data transfers The IR 320 uses channel 2 for the floppy disk drive controller and releases the other channels to the ISA bus The following table lists the DMA channel allocation DMA channels Controller DMA 8 bits 0 1 Spare Channel Application
111. GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47 Properties dialog box appears Click the Settings tab 3 48 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 6 Check DMA in the Option group box GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE4 Properties AIMAAE TeV isin ml Ja nar 7 The following dialog box appears Click OK Unsupported hardware alert MI c 8 Click OK to close the GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47 Properties dialog box 9 Click Close to close the System Properties dialog box 10 The following dialog box appears Click Yes to restart the system System Settings Change Q ceg e Installing the Network Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win98 Network PRO98MEM EXE 2 The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Rev C OS and Drivers 3 49 3 The Location to Save Files dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C IntelPRO 4 When copy of the file is completed the following dialog box is displayed Click Install now 11 FILE EXTRACTION is Complete for PRO98Me Files This file Relnotes rtf is stored in the root of the archive extraction Requirements Installation Upgrade of Drivers Troubleshooting Installation PROSet II Available Downloads OSs User Guides Addi
112. IR 300 CMDOFF Outputs all commands to the external K B neglecting the K B interface command Sets such things as the programming of the POS keyboard connected to the external K B before executing them According to this setting the command cannot be executed until it is reset or the power is turned off The CMDOFF is cancelled however when it is reset or the power to the main body is turned off and the CMDON status is resumed CMDON Accepts the command of the K B interface default value 4 54 Utilities Rev C TKOSS string TKOES string TK1SS string TK1ES string TK2SS string TK2ES string TK3SS string TK3ES string TKJSS string TKJES string BEEP ON BEEP OFF MSR m KEYTBL pathname TRACE TRON TROFF V AL xxh yyh PARA zzh IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Replaces the start flag in the MSR card unit with the string The default Mh hh is none Replaces the end flag in the MSR card unit with the string The default is none Replaces the 1track start flag of the MSR with the string The default is Ol Replaces the 1track end flag of the MSR with the string The default is ugn Replaces the 2track start flag of the MSR with the string The default is u n z Replaces the 2track end flag of the MSR with the string The default is ugn Replaces the 3track start flag of the MSR with the string The default is Replaces the 3track end flag of the MSR
113. Je fs Js Le Lo o ls Le Ls Je Lu Ls Lo ls Ls Ls Js a e lo le le le le e ele lek lelle Le le ale 8 8 e ale HHHH e 18 15 s 8 Ja la EEE Download keyboard map wait please While data is transmitted the following message is shown at the bottom of the screen Download keyboard map wait please Y Note Do not enter data from the keyboard during a download Quit Command When you select Quit the following screen is displayed Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 Leaving this utility Press Enter to quit this program You can also exit the program by pressing the ESC key but when you press ESC the file name created with the File command is not saved Error Messages The program displays the following error messages During boot up Invalid key configuration format Press any key to continue A data inconsistency exists in the key conversion file KEYTABLE DEF Check the data 4 66 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Scan code table overflow Press any key to continue Too much key definition data exists in the key conversion file KEYTABLE DEF Limit the data to the required items Load command File not exist Press any key to end The file designated by the File command does not exist Check the file name File format error Press any key to end Abnormal key definition data Check the file name Save command File create error Press any key to end Could not
114. Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for MS DOS Outline This is a MS DOS utility that loads definition files created with the layer 28 keyboard definition utility It is used when performing batch processing etc Command Execute commands in the following format PKLDL EXE data file Processing Details This utility sets the following data automatically e Saved Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for Windows files L28 This utility is not compatible with the following data e Saved Windows 84 key Definition files K84 e Saved Windows 28 key Definition files K28 4 40 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual e Saved Windows KeyLock Definition files KYL e Scan code table rewrite files for MSR PKL Checking of the validity of a specified file is done by the file extension so be sure to specify the file extension precisely Q Notes m This utility starts and runs in MS DOS It cannot be run from the DOS box Q This utility uses the keyboard interface for communications with the firmware For that reason do not use an external keyboard the 28 key keyboard KeyLock or MSR during execution Errors will occur if these are operated during data communications and it may stop running normally Q Do not press Reset or turn the power off while this utility is running Messages Message Content EPSON Layer Keyboard Auto Definition Utility Vx xx xx When started Usage Usage PKLDL data fi
115. M 2 0 for NT Advanced v M M m 4 74 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Reference The following events occur when the front switches using the environment provided by this driver are operated Front Switch Operation and the AC power error is detected AC Fail 1 2 6 de Occurrence of AC Fail AC Offline event or Front Switch Operation Notification of AC Offline Status caused by the APM BIOS Acceptance of AC Offline Status Notify by the driver Notification of WM_POWERBROADCAST from the driver to the application Termination processing by the application itself Execution of WinNT Shutdown by using the ExitWindowsEx function Execution of Auto Power of the system by the APM BIOS after WinNT Shutdown By using the WM_POWERBROADCAST notification from the driver the processing can be performed from the normal shutdown of Windows NT to the power off The following shows easy sample codes In practical operation the shutdown should be performed after terminating all applications Rev C LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc HWND hWnd UINT Message WPARAM wParam LPARAM lParam HWND hTmpWnd HBRUSH hTmpBrush HANDLE htkProcess OKEN_PRIVILEGES tkPriv UINT uFlags EWX_SHUTDOWN switch Message case WM_POWERBROADCAST OpenProcessToken GetCurrentProcess TOKEN_ADJUST_PRIVILEGES amp htkProcess tkPriv PrivilegeCount 1 LookupPrivilegeValue NULL SE SHUTDOWN_NAME amp tkPriv Privileg
116. ND power GND Power supply ground 7 12 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Appendix A Wake On LAN Overview Objective of Wake On LAN With the Wake On LAN function one machine connected to the LAN can be powered on from another machine also connected to that LAN through the network This makes it possible for the server to manage the power of all machines without the operator having to operate the soft power switches Settings for Using Wake On LAN The conditions and settings for using the Wake On LAN in the IR 320 are given below 1 AC power is being supplied Main power switch is on 11 Onboard LAN Device and Wake Up by PCI is enabled in the BIOS setup 3 The Wake On LAN application is installed in the server In the IR 320 Wake On LAN is supported only for the onboard LAN controller The function cannot be used with a general purpose NIC via a PCI card interface Wake On LAN Methods Wake On LAN can power on the IR 320 in the following two ways 1 Magic Packet received Rev C Wake On LAN A 1 Confidential Basic Operation Wake Up Signal Power Switch Signal Signal Paths in Wake On LAN If the Chipset 82801BA receives a Wake Up Signal from LAN or the Soft Power Switch is pressed it outputs a power on signal to the power supply if the poweris off or an LMI signal if the machine is in the suspend state to resume Because the wake up signa
117. ON The front CompactFlash card adapter is precise equipment so handle it gently When you remove and install the front CompactFlash card adapter be careful not to subject if to small shock vibration or bending because this may damage it Card type One Type I or Type II Power supply 3 3 V 50 mA max I F mode True IDE mode Connection to the main body Secondary IDE bus master connection 1 Open the front cover of the IR 320 If the front cover is locked unlock it with the key You may need to press in slightly as you turn the key Y l eS A BS front cover Rev C Setup 2 21 Confidential 2 Remove the HDD cover 3 Remove the CD ROM cover Keep this cover because it is not used while the front CompactFlash card adapter is installed N e 2 22 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 6 Push the front CompactFlash card adapter into the IR 320 from the front being careful not to subject it to shock or vibration and be sure the cables are not pinched Confirm that the projection under the front CompactFlash card adapter is firmly engaged with the frame projection on the IR 320 If the cable for the HDD unit is in the way of the connection for the front CompactFlash card adapter remove the HDD unit cable connect the cable for the front CompactFlash card adapter and re connect the HDD unit cable projection under the front CompactFlash card adapter frame p
118. P16 Short COM6 power output setting JP17 Open JP18 Open JP 25 1 2 fixed For system use Not changeable JP31 1 2 TM reset polarity setting See JP31 settings TM reset polarity settings on page 1 15 JP32 1 2 TM customer display flow control See JP32 settings TM customer display flow control on page 1 15 JP5 settings RTC and CMOS clear JP5 1 2 default RTC clear Normal operations 2 3 Clear Settings for JP7 to 18 COM1 COM2 COM5 COM6 power output Jumper short circuited Pin 1 function in the DB9 connector COMI JP7 Default DCD signal JP8 5 V of electrical power JP9 12 V of electrical power COM2 JP10 Default DCD signal JP11 5 V of electrical power JP12 12 V of electrical power COM5 JP13 Default DCD signal JP14 5 V of electrical power JP15 12 V of electrical power COM6 JP16 Default DCD signal JP17 5 V of electrical power JP18 12 V of electrical power IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual JP31 settings TM reset polarity settings JP31 Dedicated TM reset 1 2 default Active LOW 2 3 Active HIGH This indicates the polarity of the signal when RTS or DTR is reset Set JP3 on the POS board when RTS or DIR is reset JP32 settings TM customer display flow control JP32 Dedicated TM flow control Customer display flow control Dedicated
119. S LY Windows 2000 Professional This is set with the OS L Windows 98 SE This is set with the OS 1 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SP6a This is set with the BIOS 11 MS DOS Ver 6 22 This is set with the BIOS Windows XP 1 Select Settings Control Panel Performance and Maintenance Power Options in the Start menu of Windows 2 Power Options Properties is displayed Click the Power Schemes tab Power Options Properties Power Schemes Advanced Hibemate UPS el Select the power scheme with the most appropriate settings for A this computer Note that changing the settings below will modify the selected scheme Power schemes Home Office Desk y Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off monitor After 20 mins Turn off hard disks Never System standby Never System hibernates Never Rev C OS and Drivers 3 65 3 Select the time in the Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off hard disks option 4 Click OK Power Options Properties Power Schemes Advanced Hibemate UPS ef Select the power scheme with the most appropriate settings for this computer Note that changing the settings below will modify the selected scheme Power schemes Home Office Desk v Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off monitor After 20 mins i v Turn off hard disks Never After 3 mins After 5 mins S
120. SON MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER INFORMATION IN THE DOCUMENT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT Seiko Epson has no liability for loss or damage arising from or relating to your use of or reliance on the information in the document T You may not reproduce store or transmit the confidential information in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson 4 Your obligations under this Agreement are in addition to any other legal obligations Seiko Epson does not waive any right under this Agreement by failing to exercise it The laws of Japan apply to this Agreement CAUTIONS D This document shall apply only to the product s identified herein D No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation 1 The contents of this document are subject to change without notice Contact us for the latest information D While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document Seiko Epson Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions I Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein I Nei
121. TM reset 1 2 RTS CTS DSR DTR 2 3 default DTR DSR CTS RTS Set JP3 on the POS board when RTS or DTR is reset POS 320 Board Jumpers The POS circuit board unit has two jumpers one switch and one four polarity DIP switch that can be set Parts Side faces down when installing into the IR 320 DSW1 JP3 SW2 Back Side Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 15 Functions of JP3 and DSWI POS board 4 o e ON 7 3 DUDU JP3 DSW1 JP3 Use this jumper to make a TM printer reset using RTS or DTR effective Use this DIP switch to select the default value of the country mode of the MSR And also use the DSW1 switch when the keyboard cannot be used due to a setting error The functions of the three jumpers and the DIP switch are shown below JP3 settings TM reset enable disable setting for RTS and DTR JP3 Dedicated TM reset 1 2 Reset enabled for RTS and DTR 2 3 default Reset disabled for RTS and DTR reset only with RSTDRV DSWI1 settings DIP switch settings for keyboard controller SW Description 4 default OFF Start up mode OFF normal mode ON system boot sw1 SW2 SW3 Country OFF OFF OFF US Default ON OFF OFF Japan OFF ON OFF France ON ON OFF German OFF OFF ON Spain Up Off Down On Start up mode By switching to the enforced boot mode it is possible to start up the system using the default settings This
122. Technical Reference Manual Issued Date IR 320 Issued by EPSON English 404368102 IR 320 Technical Reference Manual CONFIDENTIALITY AGREEMENT BY USING THIS DOCUMENT YOU AGREE TO ABIDE BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN THIS DOCUMENT IMMEDIATELY IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS m This document contains confidential proprietary information of Seiko Epson Corporation or its affiliates You must keep such information confidential If the user is a business entity or organization you must limit disclosure to your employees agents and contractors who have a need to know and who are also bound by obligations of confidentiality T On the earlier of a termination of your relationship with Seiko Epson or b Seiko Epson s request you must stop using the confidential information You must then return or destroy the information as directed by Seiko Epson D Ifa court arbitrator government agency or the like orders you to disclose any confidential information you must immediately notify Seiko Epson You agree to give Seiko Epson reasonable cooperation and assistance in resisting disclosure I You may use confidential information only for the purpose of operating or servicing the products to which the document relates unless you obtain the prior written consent of Seiko Epson for some other use I Seiko Epson warrants that it has the right to disclose the confidential information SEIKO EP
123. V and 24 V in the same way as with the IR 320 but for 3 3 V External electrical capacity Power supply Application Total capacity 5 V DC PCI slot COM ports keyboard USB 3 0A 3 3 V DC PCI slot 10A 12 VDC PCI slot COM ports 15A 12VDC PCI slot 0 3 A 24 V DC Dedicated printer external TM power supply drawer customer display 2 0 A Each of these ports is restricted to the capacity limits shown below Electrical capacity of each port Port Power supply Supply capacity Remarks COM ports 5 VDC 500 mA each peak at 1 A 100 ms The total for all four ports must not exceed the value shown on the left 12 V DC 500 mA each peak at 1 A 100 ms USB port 5 V DC 500 mA each peak at 1 A 100 ms Keyboard 5V DC 500 mA each peak at 1 A 100 ms Drawer 24 V DC 1A ZN CAUTION The USB port is not supported by Windows NT Lithium Battery The IR 320 is internally equipped with a non rechargeable Lithium Battery This battery is used for backing up the RTC and the CMOS RAM built in the RTC This is different from the IR 310 Battery type CR 2032 Backup time 5 years If the message cmos check sum error appears every time the system is started up replace the battery 7 8 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual WARNING Be sure to use the IR 320 within the specified standard temperature range in particular
124. When installing the service pack install the serial driver again Q Note Be sure an administrator installs the serial driver Install the serial port driver using the following procedure 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Epserial EPSERIAL EXE 2 Start serial driver Setup The welcome screen is displayed Click Next 3 After installation is completed the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed Select Yes I want to restart my computer now then click Finish to restart the system InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed EPSON Serial Driver Before you can use the program you must restart your computer C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Back Cancel Uninstalling the serial port driver Uninstall the serial port driver using the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs 2 The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON Serial Driver is selected Click Change Remove 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the AC line tool This tool is the utility to monitor the switching of the power of the sy
125. Windows XP Professional Not available lt Edition pre installed Windows XP Professional Can be used Edition commercially sold Windows 2000 Professionall Available pre installed Windows 2000 Professionall Can be used commercially sold Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Available pre installed Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Can be used lt commercially sold Windows 98 Second Edition Available lt pre installed Windows 98 Second Edition Can be used lt commercially sold Windows 95 pre installed Available Not available Windows 95 commercially sold Can be used Cannot be used DOS pre installed Available Not available DOS commercially sold Can be used Can be used BIOS APM 1 2 Plug amp Play DMI ACPI 1 06 APM 1 2 Plug amp Play compatible Diag DMI compatible Diag POS keyboard firm Exclusive keyboard unit MSR lt unit Keylock control firmware Other OPOS English version 1 62 1 95 2 20 SP7 or later OPOS Japanese version 1 62 1 92 2 20J SP7 or later Rev C The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 B 5 Comparison for Driver Tool and Utility Here is a comparison of the drivers tools and utilities Compatibility indicates API Application Program Interface compatibility If API compatibility is Yes applications written for the IR 310 should also work with the IR 320 However be sure that you test any application written for the IR 310 to confirm that it can also be used for the IR 320 before installing it
126. a cea OR aL Nc tra 2 25 DMEERTO Tic seta as Bo oh tats Sad ede ae Be Pte ie a ate ee ERAS ER a aa 2 27 Removing the LGD Unit rinda dave seis be cave x E EA OE AG ER eos oe mean gd 2 30 DM ERI21S68IeS 3 i224 3 5 i5r a lata 2 30 DM LRIQAT uti iaa E ores alee ee Raed CaS Saw Ee ea Fae EAT Oe oe 2 32 Installing an 84 Key Keyboard Unit DM KR084 2 0 6c rr 2 35 Removing an 84 Key Keyboard Unit 0 eee nnn eens 2 37 Installing a Battery Unit OLRO03 ss 3 5 da oa Sas o Bing nd beau talks Ageless ts 2 39 Setting the BIOS iii E UA PIS PSS Betas 2 42 Installing a 28 Key Keyboard Unit DM K028 0 2 43 Handling Precaution mioarei seit cage a ds 2 44 Changing aKey Top iscsi ac ois A wosa aes ts aos eau eee kes 2 45 Installing the MSR Unit DM MR123 0 6 rr 2 48 Mounting o toan LED Unit vu Misia ated ce ERE E eed beta be dene 2 49 Mounting an MSR Unit to a 28 Key Keyboard Unit 0 c cece eee eens 2 50 Installing a Printer Tray sciet cso yvje sees SAS A A Fae a 2 52 Installing a Printet tex cvs A ash oe ded ad ao eh cen os a Pe 2 54 Installing a TM Printer iii OA ee Ee Oe ee be RES 2 54 Installing a Dedicated TM Printer Unit 2 0 00 6 6 ene eens 2 55 Installing a PCT Board vai A ak tee Shih et A as IOS ae oT ees 2 60 Installing a Customer Display 2 5 05 iso is ki ORS REM eee ien oe ee 2 62 Installing a Mouse Keyboard 1 0 0 6 ccc een nett e iih 2 67 Installing a Cash Dra Wer ono A dd sia 2 68 Attac
127. ack 4 73 Notes for Use A ere dda ee ee ees 4 74 Reference dr da wall ease Sach des Seadoo td david wie dented TTE asol 4 75 AC Line Tool For Windows 2000 98 0 0 cece cece eee ete ete ete eee e nent ett caco 4 76 Power Button Tool For Windows 2000 2 ee cc eee eee cette ne ence eee ene 4 78 BaySWapr inde dt patel hoe teed A as hated ees 4 78 Operation proteina ii Bea SG Saad a A deta T ROE 4 79 Chapter 5 BIOS Functions REStH CHONG sists oc eared Bae Baek ele GMa Pha hale Re eae ER ae Abas ae bg ER ae a Pa ES AE 5 1 HDD Power Down Timer Setting 6 6 rr 5 1 BIOS Setup tias beet ede batik ahs bibs oy Gaal Ged thd ek Ek SOA deere abu ty dads Beste 5 2 Operating Procedures a A fa was ee egy oe heed west 5 2 Troubleshooting sci ed eh wee eG O PE SN 5 3 Changing settings its bee ah ade kine Wee a wae A te Bed deed Ghee ies 5 3 BIOS Setup Main Menu 3 02 40 eed A alee Rs Ste 5 4 Standard CMOS Features Menu 0 ccc cece en nen ee ene ete ene n teen neas 5 5 Advanced BIOS Features Menu 0 00 tenn ence nen teen teen nens 5 7 Advanced Chipset Features Menu 0 6c ccc nent eens 5 10 Integr ted Periph rals Ment ocios A HRES A aa ma Dawes 5 11 Power Management Setup Menu oooccccccconnccrr rr 5 13 Supplementary Explanation for Power Management 000 c cece eect een eens 5 15 PNP PCI Configurations Menu siisii a ereina rr 5 17 Defaults and Selectable Options s secireci siorr vetita enn nent
128. ail Safe Optimized the settings are First Floppy Second Third Boot HDD 0 and Third SCSI Change the setting so that it is compatible with the system Device configuration Boot Other Even if a device search is performed in the order of First Second Third Boot Devices and a Device device that is capable of performing the startup is not found this setting can be used to execute not execute the Boot Other Device function The default setting is set as Enabled Change the setting so that it is compatible with the system configuration Enabled This setting is used to search for another device that is capable of performing the startup Disabled This setting is used to disable the search for another device that is capable of performing the startup Reference Information concerning the boot sequence If bootable SCSI drives e g HDD and CD ROM are connected some products give priority to such SCSI Drives regardless of the First Boot Device Second Boot Device Third Boot Device and Boot Other Device settings This is due to the specifications of the SCSI BIOS adapters in question Rev C 5 7 BIOS Functions Table 5 3 Advanced BIOS Features menu continued Items Boot Up Floppy Seek Description This setting is used to enable disable the head seek test either execute or not execute the head seek command for floppy drive A during the startup The default setting is Enabled Enabled This
129. al Reference Manual Installation for Windows 2000 Professional Locally Procured Edition Installation Procedure If you install Windows 2000 Professional locally procured edition follow the steps below Windows 2000 Professional Installation Insert the Windows 2000 startup disk and CD ROM then turn on the IR 320 to perform the setup Enter the product key of the COA package You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Video Driver Installation Install the Video Driver from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Chipset Driver Installation Install the Chipset Driver from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Network Driver Installation Sound Driver Installation Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 r i 1 1 Windows 2000 Service Pack Installation l l Install the Service Pack from the CD ROM for the Windows 2000 l Touch Panel Driver Installation Install the Touch Panel Driver from the CD ROM for the IR 320 r I Serial port Driver Installation I Install the Serial port Driver from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 l Rev C OS and Drivers 3 31 l AC line tool Installation When using the Battery Unit OI R03 install the software from the Driver I CD ROM for the IR 320 l Power button prohibited setting tool Installation Install the Power button prohibited setting tool from the Driver CD ROM for l the IR 320 l Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windo
130. alibration Environment Settings Version M Default Custom Stabilization fi 7 Port co Mi y Coordinates Data Sampling Cycle E IRQ 10 Y Tap Sound 140 Address Joxo2E8 y T AX gt 5PA A uo Frequency Low High Cancel Apply Help Q Note Only a user with administrator authority can use the operation setting function Each item is displayed in gray and cannot be set if an ordinary user uses the tool Default Add a check mark to use the default value for the setting Each setting item in the Custom area is displayed in gray and cannot be changed if Default is checked Remove the check mark from Default to change the settings for each item 3 60 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 1 The following dialog box is displayed if the check mark is removed from the Default item A Modifying system default might have unusual behavior x IE 2 Each of the items below can be set if OK is clicked A EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool xj Calibration Environment Settings Version T Default Custom Stabilization 1 y Port COM4 z Coordinates Data Sampling Cycle 1 y IRQ 10 y Tap Sound a heuer E Low High Stabilization Set the jitter correction value within a range of 1 to 20 The default setting is 1 The jitter correction takes multiple samplings of the touch panel device s coordinate data and calculates the average val
131. andshaking 6 cece eee eee C 5 xiv Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Chapter 1 IR 320 System Overview About the IR 320 The IR 320 is a POS personal computer with a built in touch panel In addition to capability of Network connection the IR 320 is flexible for configuring various systems with abundant devices in an OLE POS based system Model Configuration The IR 320 has various model configurations with combinations of an operating system CPU HDD CD ROM drive LCD unit and printer Please contact your dealer for details Unpacking For the unpacking see the User s Manual packed with the system IR 320 Features A Simplicity e Employing the touch panel enables even a beginner to operate the product easily It is possible to learn how to use the system in a very short time e It is designed for quick and easy setup and maintenance 0 Space saving All the functions needed for the POS system such as the printer and the LCD with the touch panel are in the small space of 252 mm wide and 457 mm deep including the rear cover Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 1 1 Abundant options for superior expandability A model having the type of LCD and printer that meet a customer s need can be selected Various options such as the CD ROM drive Front CompactFlash Adapter 28 key unit and MSR unit can be installed Various peripherals can be connected to the PCI slots and serial port
132. arge part of the work required for the development of software can be eliminated and the system can become fully open As a result comparatively small sized shops that plan to introduce the POS can easily configure an intelligent flexible POS system OPOS makes it easy to build POS applications that take advantage of the functionality that Windows has to offer such as graphics video and sound a user friendly GUI and multitasking For information on the installation procedure for the OPOS ADK see the user s guide registered in the C Backup Oposadk directory Creating the Component Software The POS device needs a control program The device control object once existed as a part of monolithic POS application software Because of this monolithic structure POS system designers had to replace or change the entire POS application software to change the device control object alone when a peripheral device was replaced This work claimed a lot of time and money POS application software developers had to become experts about each manufacturer s devices including functions and command systems to create a device control object With the advent of the PC POS however any external device is now connectable to a PC as long as the interface serial parallel or whatever is supported While the problem with the compatibility of the hardware was solved in this way a problem with the software still existed The software was not applicable and
133. at copying of the file starts Reboot the system again according to the instructions on the screen Video Driver Installation Method 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Start COMMAND PROMPT by pressing Shift F10 in the Locale Setting Change the CD ROM Eject the CD ROM of Windows XP and Insert the Driver CD ROM of IR 320 Execute WinXP Video WIN2K_XPE67 EXE in the Driver CD ROM of IR 320 The Release note is displayed Click Next The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The License Agreement dialog box is displayed Click Yes Installing is completed and the reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that No I will restart my computer later is selected and click Finish Finish the COMMAND PROMPT using Exit Enter Change the CD ROM Eject the Driver CD ROM of IR 320 Insert the CD ROM of Windows XP Video Driver Install End 16 17 18 19 Rev C The Regional and Language Options dialog box is displayed Confirm the setting contents and click Next The Personalize Your Software dialog box is displayed Input your name and your organization and then click Next The Your Product key dialog box is displayed Input the 25 digit product key shown on the COA Certificate of Authenticity and click Next The Computer Name and Administrator Password dialog box is displayed Input the necessary information and click Next OS and
134. ations CPU Celeron PPGA An Intel Celeron processor is used as the CPU Frequency Package L2 cache System Bus CPU 1 2GHz FCPGA2 256KB 100MHz 733MHz FCPGA 128KB 66MHz Memory 168 pin DIMM Two 168 pin DIMM sockets are available and a maximum of 512 MB of memory can be mounted The DRAM supports only the 3 3 V SDRAM synchronous DRAM A single DIMM can be used It also is possible to use DIMMs of two differing capacities DIMMs must conform to the Intel PC SDRAM unbuffered DIMM specifications SDRAM specifications Conform to the Intel PC SDRAM Specifications Applicable to PC100 The DIMM of the PC133 can be used but it works at 100MHz Video Controller The video controller in the chipset Intel 810E2 The video memory uses the part of the main memory and the color count settings shown below are possible for each resolution Display devices and colors that can be set Display device Resolution dots DM LR104T DM LR1215V 121SL CRT 640 x 480 16 770 000 colors 800 x 600 16 770 000 colors 16 770 000 colors 16 770 000 colors 1024 x 768 65 000 colors Notes 1 The table above shows the number of colors that can be set The number of colors that can be actually displayed is limited to the number of display colors for each LCD unit 2 16 770 000 colors 16 M colors 24 bit 65 000 colors 64 K colors 16 bit Note The number of colors that the TFT ty
135. atures al 3 34 OS and Drivers Rev C 5 IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual The following dialog box is displayed Click Finish Installation instructions 11 FILE EXTRACTION IS COMPLETE PRO2KXP EXE This file Relnotes rtf is stored in the root of the archive extraction Requirements Installation Upgrade of Drivers Troubleshooting Installation PROSet II Available Downloads OSs User Guides Additional Features 4 Uninstalling the network driver To uninstall the Network Driver use the following procedure 1 2 3 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when Intel R PRO Ethernet Adapter and Software is selected Click Change Remove The Intel R PRO Adapters and Software Uninstaller dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the Sound Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Sound SETUP EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The Digital Signature Not Found dialog box is displayed Click Yes The reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling th
136. auto Master Slave detection performed during the POST the DMA mode support status for the connection device UDMA is determined as BIOS If any of the devices connected does not support DMA mode the maximum mode that device supports will be set If On Chip Primary Secondary PCI IDE is set to Disabled the corresponding items cannot be changed When using the UDMA set as Auto The transfer mode for the DMA mode compatible device connected to the IDE interface in each OS can be changed to the DMA mode using the following methods For BIOS settings set IDE UDMA to Auto This has been supported for the OS for EPSON 1 Windows NT Using a tool in Service Pack 6a Refer to Chapter 3 2 Windows 98 Setting the OS Refer to Chapter 3 3 Windows 2000 By applying Chip Set Driver the mode can be automatically changed to he DMA mode 4 Windows XP The DMA mode is automatically set upon installing the Windows XP operating system USB Controller This setting is used to enable disable the USB controller housed in the chip set ICH2 The default setting is set as Enabled Perform setting according to your system configuration whether or not a USB device is connected If the Disabled setting is used USB Keyboard Support can be selected and this function is not supported The PnP BIOS automatically determines the IRQ resource settings for the USB controller USB Keyboard Support This setting enabl
137. be a master and one must be a slave The IR 320 will not boot from the slave drive An HDD may be set to either a master or slave whether it is installed in the upper drive bay or the lower drive bay Rev C Setup 2 9 Confidential 3 Attach the HDD plate with four screws HDD plate 3 Installing the HDD unit Install the HDD unit using the steps below If you are installing the HDD where the cables will be hidden as shown in step 3 of Removing the HDD unit use the steps for Installing the HDD unit where the cables will be hidden later in this section 1 Push the HDD unit into the IR 320 from the front Be careful not to subject the HDD to shock or vibration and be sure the cables are not pinched Confirm that the projection on the mounting plate under the HDD is firmly engaged with the frame projection on the IR 320 projection on HDD mounting plate e frame projection 2 Connect the two cables for the HDD unit to their connectors 2 10 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 3 Lock the HDD unit with two screws 4 Reattach the HDD cover 5 Close the front cover 6 Turn on the IR 320 start up the BIOS setup and confirm that the HDD is normally identified For information on the BIOS setup see Chapter 5 BIOS Functions Installing a 3 5 HDD Unit OI HDD The IR 320 has one or two 2 5 HDDs or one 3 5 HDD depending on its specifications Up to two 2 5
138. board MSR customer display the cash drawer and so on Setting the keyboard firmware with the keyboard firmware setting utility Making the Operating confirmation with definition data file Device Diagnostics Utility SS 1 I Setting to define automatically 1 I for more than one system l The setup completion Rev C Setup 2 1 Confidential Battery Attaaching the battery unit Setting the BIOS Installing the APM driver a EE Requreo Installing the Power Button tool for Windows 98 2000 SS 1 Installing the AC line tool Sse 4 for Windows 2000 XP The setup completion Refer to each item about the other peripheral devices and options Precautions for Setting Up In addition to the precautions below warning instructions and cautions to note are given at each work stage ZN CAUTION a Turn off the power for all equipment including the IR 320 and all peripherals before setup Turn off the main side power switch for the IR 320 Unplug the power cables for the IR 320 and its peripheral units from the outlet If the power is not turned off the IR 320 or peripheral units may be damaged during setup A When the battery unit is installed and the power is on do not turn off the main side power switch or unplug the power cable until you put the IR 320 in the soft off mode with the soft front power switch Then you can turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cable If the main p
139. box is displayed if the programming ends normally 28KeyCfg O 4 36 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Saving the Settings The current settings can be saved as a file Save the settings by the following procedure 1 Clicking the Save button displays the Save as dialog box Te x Save in 28KB Coroa xe 0e em sa test 128 File name SAMPLE L28 Save as type 28 Keyboard Config file 128 y Cancel 2 Input the file name and click the Save button to save the settings in a file Be sure to specify L28 as the file extension 3 The following dialog box is displayed if a file with the same name as the specified file already exists Clicking the Yes button overwrites the existing file Clicking the No button cancels the save operation 28KeyCfg E Specified file already exists Overwrite it Y Notes Q If the Exit New or Load button is clicked while the settings are changed but have not been saved the dialog boxes shown below are displayed and confirmation of whether or not to save the current settings is requested Clicking the Yes button opens the Save dialog box Clicking the No button discards the current settings and causes processing to resume Clicking the Cancel button returns the program to the previous state If the Exit button is clicked Key Configuration has already been changed Save it before exit E No Cancel Rev C Utilities 4 37 If
140. by the following procedure 1 Start Windows 2 Select Programs EPSON Touch Panel Tool Right Button Emulator in that order from the Start menu 3 The touch panel right emulator starts and the following dialog box is displayed 1 Tap Mode Operation 1 Setting the Mode The touch panel right button emulator is equipped with the following two modes 1 1tap mode One tap only after the right button is specified is recognized as a right click This mode is set as the default 2 Right Fix Mode Taps after the right button is specified are always recognized as right clicks The mode is switched in the right button emulator menu The menu is displayed by tapping the icon on the title bar then the desired mode is selected The set mode is displayed underneath the mouse icon m TL Move v 1 Tap Mode Right Fix Mode Alt F4 2 Switching between the right and left buttons Switching between the right and left buttons can be accomplished by tapping the mouse icon The mouse icon color changes to the color corresponding to the right button or left button each time the icon is tapped enabling the operator to recognize which button is selected Rev C OS and Drivers 3 63 When operating the right button This operation sends touch panel coordinate data as mouse right button data IM x II x Sy S 4 a 1Tap Mode Right Fix Mode When in the 1 Tap Mode When in the Right Fix Mode When operating the
141. cation It can print a document made with the text editor and the image data can be printed from software such as the Internet Explorer or Paint Choose the printer driver to use according to the print purpose Ex For the TM T88IIR EPSON TM TS88II R Receipt It prints at usual character size EPSON TM T88I R Reduce35 It prints as a reduction in the receipt paper size Change the printer driver to use by following the steps below 1 Start the system and choose Setting Printer in the start menu 2 The Printers dialog is displayed Confirm thet the icon of the installed printer driver is displayed 3 Click the icon of the printer driver for using to print and choose Set as Default Printer from the menu that is displayed by the right click 4 The icon of the printer driver has a check mark and it is set as the default printer 2 74 Setup Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Chapter 3 OS and Drivers Outline of This Chapter This chapter tells which Operating Systems and Drivers can be used and how to install and uninstall them Operating Systems The following Operating Systems can be used for the IR 320 m m m m m Windows 2000 Professional There is a version preinstalled by EPSON Windows XP Professional Edition Windows 98 SE There is a version preinstalled by EPSON Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SP6a There is a version preinstalled by EPSON MS DOS Ver 6 22 Drivers and Utilities Dri
142. ce This item indicates the head fixed track number for the connection device The following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS When connecting a device for which there is no particular value specified the number 1 is specified as the maximum number of cylinders Sector This item indicates the number of sectors for the connection device The following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 255 only when the access method is set as CHS 3 FDD Error Halt The items related to the FDD and error that halt at boot up are as follows Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Drive A None 360K 5 25 in 2M 5 25 in 720K 3 5 in 44M 3 5 in 2 88M 3 5 in None 1 44M 3 5 in Halt On All Errors No Errors All But Keyboard All But Diskette All But Disk Key All Errors All Errors Notes When the Drive Ais None setting the system resources such as the IRQ cannot be released 5 20 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Advanced BIOS Features The basic items related
143. ch cable Rev C Setup 2 67 Confidential Q Note When using a keyboard mouse branch cable you need to attach the mouse to the keyboard connector and the keyboard to the mouse connector Therefore you connect the keyboard to the M connector and the mouse to the K connector connector marked with K connector marked with M Installing a Cash Drawer The cash drawer is controlled via the printer unit If the printer unit is not connected the cash drawer cannot be controlled When a dedicated printer is connected connect the cash drawer connector to the drawer connector on the IR 320 drawer connector When another type of TM printer is connected connect the cash drawer connector to the TM printer drawer connector Q Note When a non dedicated type TM printer is connected do not connect the cash drawer connector to the drawer connector of the IR 320 ZN CAUTION Do not connect a telephone line to the DK connector 2 68 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Attaching a Power Cable ZN WARNING L Never insert or disconnect the power plug with wet hands This may result in severe shock A Do not place multiple loads on the power outlet wall outlet Overloading the outlet may lead fo fire 1 Do not plug in the power cable if the power plug is contaminated with dust or
144. ch file for setup a floppy disk can be used to store this file including definition data and a batch file program systems having the same settings can be set up in a short period of time e By storing key definition data in a server the key definition data of multiple systems can be managed uniformly and the definition data of all systems can be changed simultaneously Keyboard Firmware and Utilities Utilities for setting the MSR writing the definition data for the KeyLock and 28 key keyboard into the keyboard firmware and others are provided Also the settings for the MSR and the definition data for the Key Lock and 28 key keyboard can be saved in a file as a definition file and that definition file can be written into the keyboard firmware by using an appropriate definition data automatic setting utility This method makes it possible to set up multiple systems using the same settings or it can be executed as a batch file and for writing it into another system are also provided Function Utility for Windows Utility for MS DOS MSR setting PKMODE32 EXE PKMODE2 EXE KEYLOCKCFG EXE None Key Lock definition 28 key definition 28KEYCFG EXE POSKB28 EXE 84 key definition 84KEYCFG EXE POSKB EXE Layer supported 28 key definition 28KYCFGL EXE None Writing definition files into PKLOAD32 EXE PKLOAD EXE keyboard firmware Writing definition files into PKLDL32 EXE PKLDL EXE keyboard firmware
145. d Always use the default setting Enabled Choose this to set the multi sector transfer mode lf data is stored extending over continuous sectors performance will improve Disabled This sets the single sector transfer mode Onboard Lan This setting enables disables the PXE Boot Agent function Boot ROM When the Onboard LAN Device is Disabled the Onboard Lan Boot ROM setting does not function The default setting is Enabled Enabled Choose this if the PXE Boot Agent function is used Disabled Choose this if the PXE Boot Agent function is not used When OS mistakes the PCI I F Cara it is possible to avoid in setting Disabled When Disablea setting the PXE Boot Agent function cannot be used Onboard FDC This setting enables disables the floppy controller inside the S 1 O W83627 Controller The default setting is Enabled Always use the default setting Enabled Choose this if the FDD is used Disabled Choose this if the FDD is not used Onboard Serial This setting enables disables serial controller 1 2 3 4 combination of the I O address and IRQ Port 1 2 3 4 resource for serial port 1 inside the S 1 O W83627 The default setting are as follows Serial Port 1 3F8 IRQ4 Serial Port 2 2F8 IRQ3 Serial Port 3 3E8 IRQ11 Serial Port 4 2E8 IRQ10 There are options the 3F8 IRQ4 setting 2F8 IRQ3 setting 3E8 IRQ4 setting 2E8 IRQ3 setting 3F8 IRQ11 setting 2F8 IRQ10 setting 3E8 IRQ11
146. d the system BIOS resides in the 64 KB area between 0F0000h and OFFFFFh and the video BIOS resides in the 44 KB area 40 KB for the IR 300 between 0C0000h and OCBFFFh The area between 0A0000h and OFFFFFh in the system memory main DRAM is used for the shadow memory and system management memory SMM The figure below is a system memory map 0B8000h 0B0000h video buffer area hics DE o RAM expanded memory area 100000h system BIOS OF0000h system ROM area oe lE ap OCB000h A expanded ROM area video BIOS 0C0000h conventional memory area 000000h 7 2 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual I O Map The system I O map is PC AT compatible and the I O address is allocated as listed in the table below Use either the BIOS setup program or Plug amp Play function to change the serial and parallel port addresses 1 0 map 1 O address Description Changeable Device 00h to 1Fh DMA controller 8237A NO 82801BA 20h to 3Fh Interrupt controller 1 8259A NO 82801BA 40h to 5Fh Timer counter 8254 NO 82801BA 60h to 6Fh Keyboard controller 8042 NO W83627F 70h to 7Fh Real time clock NMI mask NO 82801BA 90h to 9Fh DMA page register NO 82801BA AOh to BFh Interrupt controller 2 8259A NO 82801BA B2h to B3h Advanced Power Management control NO 82801BA COh to DFh DMA controller 2 8237A NO 82801BA
147. d Configuration Utility Vx xx xx Firmware Version Vx xx xx 4 56 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual As parameters execute correctly the following messages are displayed POS key status messages Parameter Message MSR MSR track MSR3 MSR track3 MSR MSR default US US 101 keyboard JP JP 106 keyboard FR French keyboard GR German keyboard SP Spanish keyboard CMDOFF Command Function OFF CMDON Command Function ON TKOSS Card Start Sentinel string TKOES Card End Sentinel string TR SS Track Start Sentinel string TK ES Track End Sentinel string TKJSS JIS2 Start Sentinel string TKJES JIS2 End Sentinel string BEEP ON MSR Beep ON BEEP OFF MSR Beep OFF MSR m MSR track m KEYTBL Set KeyTable TRACE TRON TROFF See VAL Set Adadr VAL xxh yyh PARA CODE DATA Parameter Dump ADDR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0123456789ABCDEF 0000 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF 0010 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 0123456789 lt gt QOEO 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B AC 4D 4E 4F ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO OOFO 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F PQRSTUVWXYZ 4_ KEYL KeyLock Position KEY SetKey datasii ofs jj num kk 2is 1 2 or 3 Rev C Utilities 4 57 Error messages are shown below POS
148. d and click the Add Remove button 4 The dialog to confirm the uninstallation appears Click OK to execute the uninstallation Usage If you install the tool when the system power is switched from the AC Line to the battery drive it transmits WM_POWERBROADCAST and PBT_APMPOWERSTATUSCHANGE to all the windows Startup If you install the tool when the sytem set to the registry starts up the tool is set to start up automatically When the tool starts up the icon appears in the task tray 4 76 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Exit Right click the icon on the task tray and select Exit from the pop up menu to exit the tool Rev C Utilities 4 77 Power Button Tool For Windows 2000 This tool is used to set the registry so that neither the shut down mode or stand by mode can be entered even if the front power switch is pressed This can prevent the system shut down due to an incorrect operation of the front power switch Notes on usage If you update the Power Control of Windows the settings are cleared Therefore be sure to set the settings after updating it Usage 1 Execute C backup dissw DISSW EXE 2 The following message appears Click Yes C3 When you press the power button on IM 320 this program sets 2 Windows 982000 to do nothing Do you want to continue 3 When the registery is set the following message appears Clicking Yes reboots Windows and t
149. data from a key definition file Save 3 Writing data to a key definition file Edit 4 Editing a key definition file Download 5 Writing defined keys to the keyboard 21 Character Than version 2 11 newer Rev C Utilities 4 61 Start The key definition utility for DOS is stored in the following directory by default C Program Files Key Config poskb exe In DOS mode this file is shown as C progra 1 keycon 1 poskb exe To execute this utility quit Windows and restart the IR 310 320 in the DOS mode Type the command name on the keyboard and the following screen is displayed Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 Input the file name for load save or edit Basic Operations The utility has the five command buttons below File Names the file Key definitions are saved or loaded using the file name created with this function Load Loads the key definition data file you specify Save Writes key definition data to the disk file named by the file function Edit Edits key definitions one key at a time Download Writes the key definition data to the keyboard memory The keyboard data does not change until the key definition data is downloaded Select the command with the right or left arrow key and press Enter to execute it To exit the program select Quit File Command When you select File the following screen is displayed 4 62 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Epson POS Keyboard Utilit
150. definition utility for Windows 95 98 and Windows 2000 NT Layer supported 28 key automatic definition utility for MS DOS Layer switching and reading library These utilities are not preinstalled If you want to use any of these utilities please contact an EPSON dealer Power Management Driver APM 2 0 his is included with the battery unit Ol RO3 021 gt AC Line tool ey are preinstalled in the BACKUP Epsbatt der gt O Power button tool h They are preinstalled in the BACKUP Dissw h folder Logon Tool They are preinstalled in the BACKUP LOGON folder They can be used by running Setup Bay Swap This is included with the front CF adapter Ol RO7 of the option EPSON OPOS ADK They are preinstalled in the BACKUP OPOSADK folder They can be used by running Setup ZN CAUTION The floppy disks that come with the DM KRO28 and DM MR123 also contain utilities but do nof use these utilities with the IR 310 and IR 320 4 4 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Keyboard Firmware Related Utilities MSR Key Lock 28 key Keyboard These include utilities related to the keyboard firmware These utilities are used to set the MSR the definition data for the Key Lock and the definition data for the 28 key keyboard Keyboard Firmware What is the keyboard firmware The IR 320 is equipped with a special POS device keyboard controller LSI
151. dicates the port the device diagnostics utility is using to transmit data Baud rate ndicates the baud rate that the device self diagnostic utility is using to communicate with the customer display Word length ndicates the word length that the device self diagnostic utility is using to communicate with the customer display Parity ndicates whether the device self diagnostic utility is using parity to communicate with he customer display DM status ndicates DM status See the table below Table 6 5 DM status messages Message Disable Description COM port A is not set at 3F8h Set COM port A to 3F8h in setup No communication The device self diagnostic utility cannot communicate with the customer display Check the following items Q Is the customer display connected Before connecting the cable be sure to power off the IR 320 Q Are the data communication DIP switches the same for the customer display and the TM printer Q Is the power switch of the customer display turned on a Is the customer display executing the self test Do not execute the self test If the customer display does not meet these conditions correct the problem and select the Initialize option from the menu bar If all the above conditions are satisfied probable causes are the following a The customer display interface circuit of the IR 320 does not operate normally a The customer display does not operate normally
152. do not subject it fo even the slightest shock or vibration 1 Removing the HDD unit 1 Open the front cover of the IR 320 If the front cover is locked unlock it with the front key To unlock the front cover insert the key into the front lock and push in slightly while you turn it front cover 2 Open the HDD cover by lightly pressing down on the upper pin lock Ss ET yee FX A I Rev C Setup 2 7 Confidential 3 Remove the two screws from the HDD unit 4 Pull the HDD unit toward the front slightly while watching the cables and remove the two cables for the HDD unit from the their connectors 5 Remove the HDD unit 6 Remove the four screws from the HDD unit and remove the HDD plate 2 8 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 7 When removing the HDD drive remove the four screws for the HDD drive as shown in the figure below and remove it removing the HDD in the lower drive bay removing the HDD in the upper drive bay DN TO D a Y 8 2 Installing the HDD 1 Install the HDD in the HDD unit and attach it with four screws installing the HDD in the lower drive bay installing the HDD in the upper drive bay 2 When you use two HDDs set the jumpers to make one a master and the other a slave To make an HDD a master drive remove the jumper To make an HDD a slave set the jumper Q Note When you use two drives one must
153. dows DOS Backup of MSR Utility for MS DOS Chipset a Backup of Chipset driver Dissw Power button prohibited setting tool backup folder Epsbatt AC line tool backup folder Logon Backup of Logon tool Network A Backup of Network Driver Sound Backup of Sound Driver Touch f Backup of Touch Panel Driver Video Backup of Display Driver Recovery Data Backup of HD for creating Recovery Media Restore EasyRestore Bootfd f Start up FD Data Data of Start up FD My Documents Windows a Windows 98 Second Edition system The directories under the Backup directory are the backups for drivers and utilities Each of these directories can be backed up onto CD R or other media After backup the directories under the Backup directory may be deleted 3 22 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Windows 98 Set Up Procedure Windows 98 is set up by using the following procedure 1 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IR 320 Turn on the PC to start Windows 98 SE The Enter Network Password dialog box is displayed Input the password and click OK The Welcome screen is displayed Input the necessary information and click Next The Windows End User license Agreement is displayed Read it though and confirm your agreement to the terms And then select I accept this agreement and click Next to proceed The Windows Product Key screen is
154. dows Registry setting q xi gt When you press the power button on IM Series this program sets Windows 98 2000 to 7 do nothing Do you want to continue When setting the registry the following message is displayed Click Yes so Windows is restarted and the setting becomes valid If you click No the setting returns to Windows without becoming valid In this case if you then restart Windows the setting becomes valid Registry setting xd Q To finish setting you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer now Adding Windows 2000 Applications When adding any Windows 2000 application specify the C 11386 directory In this directory M1386 has been backed up from the Windows 2000 CD ROM Rev C OS and Drivers 3 11 Support Information Right click the My Computer icon and select Properties from the pull down menu Then the System properties are displayed System Properties SEIKO EPSON Corp 3 12 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Recovering the OS Preparing confirmation Confirm the following before OS recovery When the CD ROM drive OI R06 is connected OS recovery can be done just as it is starting up from the CD ROM drive When using the other drive the start up floppy disk is necessary Refer to the README e TXT file and create a start up floppy disk The Windows 2000 CD ROM included with the product is
155. dows 2000 Professional Windows NT Workstation 4 0 and Windows 98 Second Edition can select the EPSON pre installed HDD The IR 320 Driver CD ROM that includes an appropriate driver for an operating system is included See OS Information in Chapter 3 Y Note The USB interface is not supported by Windows NT and MS DOS Windows NT supports the USB Keyboard Be sure to make the recovery media and back up the data See Recovering the OS in Chapter 3 for details When you need to repair the HDD use the recovery disk Utilities Driver software and utilities software that operate and set peripherals are provided for the IR 320 Appropriate setting utility software is provided for each peripheral related to keyboard firmware such as 28 key unit MSR unit and key lock Windows driver software is provided for the printer customer display and drawer Contact your dealer for the latest drivers and utilities information Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 9 Operation Modes The IR 320 has the following five operation modes 1 Mechanical Off Mode In the mechanical off mode the main power switch is off No power is supplied to the IR 320 main body and the power in all circuits is off To turn on the power to the IR 320 first turn on the main power switch 2 Soft Off Mode In the soft off mode only the main power switch is on Items such as the clock circuit backup circuit and power management circuit inside
156. e OI R0O7 front CompactFlash adapter eject button Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 5 Connector Names The figures below show the connectors on the IR 320 Customer display switch Customer display connector TM power connector Fuse Drawer kick connector AC inlet AC outlet COM5 port PCI slots Pra a Ooo O pe SS ES A LPT port MIC Line l COM2 port ae COMI port Line Out Display connector USB connector Main power switch USB KB mouse 1 6 IR 320 System Overview Rev C Hardware Configurations IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The IR 320 is an IBM PS 2 compatible system specifically designed for the POS environment The IR 320 has the following features m O O Coco Intel Celeron processors are used These high speed CPU processors offer the power and speed needed for data processing Two 168 pin DIMM sockets enable a maximum of 512MB RAM memory One 88 9 mm 3 5 HDD or two 63 5 mm 2 5 HDDs can be installed internally An optional CD ROM drive CD R RW drive or FrontCompactFlash adapter can be installed internally An Ethernet controller supports 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Contains two PCI slots Compact size of 252 x 386 x 250 mm W x D x H 9 9 x 15 2 x 9 8 Without Rear Cover An AC outlet max 3A that is on whene
157. e Manual 4 The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed Specify the program folder name Keyboard Config Utilities is the default Click Next 5 The screen for confirming the setting contents is displayed Click Next Installation starts ristall Strela 6 Upon completion of the installation the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Click Next Rev C Utilities 4 9 Keyboard Firmware Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 The keyboard firmware setting utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 changes keyboard firmware This utility is used to change the MSR settings Start The keyboard firmware setting utility PK MODE32 EXE is stored in the following directory by default C Program Files Key Config Start the keyboard firmware utility in either of the following ways LY Double click PKMODE32 EXE from Windows Explorer LY Select Keyboard Config Utilities and then MSR amp Keyboard Configuration Utility from the Program menu Y Note This program is also contained on the floppy disk packaged with the MSR unit and the 28 key keyboard unit Do not use this floppy disk however because it is exclusively for the IR 300 When the program starts the following screen appears EMSR Keyboard Configuration Utility O x MSR Tracks Recognition 4 Ignore MSR Keyboard Commands Y ISO NIS1 Track 1 Y Use MSR Beep Y ISOMIS1 Track 2 MSR Code Type IV 180 Track 3 English
158. e base Be sure that the projection on the base snaps into the hole in the extension 2 64 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual ZN CAUTION T Detour the extra length of the cable around the power fan If fhe cable interferes with the power fan abnormal noise may be emitted or fhe cable may be disconnected 1 Do not connect any cable other than the customer display cable such as a telephone line to the connector for the customer display Db QoX Lt BG Eo 000 6 Set the DIP switch so that the baud rate of the customer display is the same as the baud rate of the printer unit The position of the DIP switch should be set as follows zB Note The customer display and the baud rate of the dedicated printer unit are set to the same speed at the factory shipment DM D110 DM D210 eel lal Le eal DM D500 Rev C Setup 2 65 Confidential For the DM D110 and DM D210 set SW5 SW6 and SW7 of DIP switch bank 1 DSW1 as indicated in the following table SW1 5 SW1 6 SW1 7 Transfer speed bps ON ON ON 2400 OFF ON ON 4800 ON OFF ON 9600 OFF OFF ON 19200 ON ON OFF 38400 OFF ON OFF 57600 ON OFF OFF 115200 1 1 When using the data pass through connection default setting you must no
159. e data during the MSR reading are specified It is possible to specify this setting for each card and each track Leave this field blank if no character is to be added The default settings are as follows Track 1 Start Track 1 End Track 2 Start Track 2 End Track 3 Start Track 3 End Use any of the following special characters Carriage return AR or r Tab NT or t Ms Mis Mh ny Others xx Specified directly with xx representing character codes as hexadecimals Rev C Utilities 4 11 OPOS ADK Settings with the DM MR123 When using the DM MR123 with the EPSON OPOS ADK pay attention to the following items m The DM MR123 is applicable to EPSON OPOS ADK Ver 1 9x and newer versions To read the JIS2 card by using the DM MR123 use EPSON OPOS ADK Ver 1 9x or newer version When the DM MR123 is used as a conventional model DM MR111 EPSON OPOS ADK Ver 1 62 or newer versions can be used In this case select the DM MR111 012 as an applicable model although it cannot read the JIS2 card Also specify a track that can be read by the Keyboard Firm Setting utility for Windows or the PEMODE2 utility Select the 101K B keyboard To have the JIS2 type card read set the end flag to Space Line feed JIS2 End 20 r Key Lock Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 The Key Lock Setting utility sets the function of eac
160. e default setting is C IntelPRO The Select OEM option dialog box is displayed Select the Intel R PRO 100 Family Adapter and click OK OS and Drivers 3 41 10 The Intel R PRO 100 Family Adapter is added to the network adapter Click Next 11 Select the network protocol Set it to your system Then click Next 12 Select the network service Set it to your system Then click Next 13 The confirm dialog box is displayed When Next is clicked installation starts 14 The dialog box that specifies the directory of the copy origin is displayed Insert the CD ROM of Windows NT in the CD ROM drive and input D if the CD ROM drive is the D drive and click OK 15 In accordance with the environment used continue the installation according to the instructions on the screen 16 When installing is completed according to the instructions on the screen reboot the system ZN CAUTION If the network is installed after the setup an error is caused in the logon procedure After installing the network driver install Service Pack 6a Uninstalling the network driver Uninstalling cannot be done Uninstalling cannot be done Installing Service Pack 6a This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Service Pack 6a CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Execute the Nt4sp6 Sp6i386 exe on the Service Pack 6a CD ROM 2 The Setup Wizard starts the License Agreement dialog box is displayed Select Accept the licen
161. e it when you press Enter LI Press Esc to close a pull down menu or a dialog box 1 Press Backspace to correct typing Setup Menu The following two commands can be executed from the setup menu D Drawer Password The password for accessing the drawer kick out test can be set L Drawer ON Time Sets the length of time for the voltage signal supplied to the cash drawer solenoid to open it d M B Information The device property version of the MAC address and keyboard firmware are confirmed 6 8 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Setting a password for the drawer kick out test Follow the procedures below to set a password for the drawer kick out test 1 Select Drawer Password from the pull down menu Enter the password Device tests Initialize Exit a Drawer ON time M B Information COM Por Drawer Password Enter a Drawer ON Time High 2 Type a password and press Enter The password should be four to eight alphanumeric characters It is case sensitive Enter at least four alphanumeric characters 3 The Re enter message appears Enter the password again and press Enter Then the password will be saved If a password is set you will be asked to enter the password each time the drawer kick out test is executed Changing deleting the password for the drawer kick out test Follow the procedures below to change or delete the password for the drawer kick o
162. e settings in accordance with the environment then click Next The dialog displayed by the following procedure is different depending on the type of the set network connection The explanation here is for the case in which Connect directly to another computer is selected Setting of other network connections can be accomplished in the same way by following instructions of the Network Connection Wizard Network Connection Wizard 4 Network Connection Type You can choose the type of network connection you want to create based on your network configuration and your networking needs C Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN C Dial up to the Internet Connect to the Intemet using my phone line modem or ISDN C Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the Internet C Accept incoming connections Let other computers connect to mine by phone line the Internet or direct cable 7 The Host or Guest dialog box is displayed Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next The explanation here is for the case in which Host is selected 8 The Connection Device dialog box is displayed Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next 9 The Allowed Users dialog box is displayed Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click Next 10 The Completing the Network Con
163. e sound driver Uninstall the Sound Driver using the following procedure 1 2 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when Sound MAX is selected Click Change Remove The Sound MAX Install dialog box is displayed Confirm that Remove all is selected and click Next The reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system OS and Drivers 3 35 Rev C Installing the Touch Panel Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Touch EPSTPWDM EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C Program Files EPSON TouchPanel The Digital Signature Not Found dialog box is displayed Click Yes The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the touch panel driver Uninstall the Touch Panel Driver using the following procedure 1 2 4 5 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs
164. e table below Shift Mode Concurrent pressing key information Shift Used for the scan codes with the Shift key Control Used for the scan codes with the Ctrl key Alt Used for the scan codes with the Alt key Kanj 1 2 3 4 sS 6 7 8 9 0 A BS 757 80 Insert Home Delete End 85 Pal PgUp 86 ii v P List of key numbers keys shaded in gray cannot be set Power Management Driver APM2 0 When this driver is installed the following power management functions become available e Turning off the power to the system after shutting down Windows NT e Notification that the front power switch was pressed e Notification that the AC power is abnormal The Power Management Driver APM2 0 is attached to the battery unit OI R03 021 Installation When the driver has not yet been installed install it by using the following procedure Q Note Install the driver after completion of all setting work for Windows NT including the Service Pack Leave the installation work for the driver to a user qualified as an administrator 1 Exit all applications under execution Rev C Utilities 4 71 2 Insert the floppy disk attached to the OI R03 into the floppy disk drive of the IR 320 3 Execute APM32 EXE on the floppy disk 4 The following dialog box for specifying the destination of extraction is displayed Confirm the destination of extraction and click Unzip Then the Setup program is extracted into the specified directory
165. e the optimum settings for the system and generally do not need to be changed See Table 5 4 Integrated Peripherals Its items for controlling the input and output for the IDE controller the USB controller the parallel port and the serial port See Table 5 5 Power Management Setup Sets items related to BIOS based power regulation of the power management timer wake up event and timer reset event See Table 5 6 PnP PCI Configurations Sets items related to system resource allocation of IRQ numbers and DMA channel numbers generally do not need to be changed Default setting is Auto See Table 5 7 Frequency Voltage Control it only displays items and no selection can be made Load Fail Safe Defaults The load fail Safe defaults are executed when the minimum preset prescribed values required for the startup are set for each item This function is only provided for troubleshooting and is normally not used Load Optimized Defaults The load optimized defaults are executed when preset prescribed values are set for each item so that the system operates under optimum conditions It is also executed when the CMOS checksum error Defaults Loaded message is displayed and each item is restored to its prescribed value Set Supervisor Password This function sets the system protection password The password can be set for up to 8 characters case sensitive The input demand timing for the pa
166. ed Save As Save in E Key Config El Ex le a Default kyl File name key01 kyl Save as type Key Lock Config file kyl y Ena T Open as read only 2 If you input a file name and click Save the settings are saved in a file Use the file extension kyl Rev C Utilities 4 15 Loading the Settings Load the settings as follows 1 If you click Load the Open dialog box is displayed Look in fa Key Config y E c E sl a Default kyl Filename ken Ss Files of type key Lock Config file kyl y Ena TF Open as read only 2 If you select a file name and click Open the selected setting is loaded New To clear the current settings and create new settings click New All the key settings are cleared Exit If you click Exit the key lock setting utility is exited 4 16 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 28 Key Definition Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 The 28 Key Definition utility can define the keys of the 28 key keyboard unit connected to the IR 320 in Windows For information on definable keys see the table Definable keys on page 4 23 Q Note When using this utility observe the following The Shift Ctrl or Alt keys cannot be registered alone but they can be registered in combination with other keys Pressing the Windows Menu or Print Screen keys is specially treated on the system and therefore these keys cannot be registered alone Concurr
167. ed Enabled Choose this to have the BIOS handle as a recovery event or to use the WOL function Disabled Choose this not to have the BIOS handle as a recovery event or not to use the WOL function Power On by Use this setting enable disable turning the power on with the modem ring signal Ring The default setting is Disabled Enabled Choose this if the power is turned on using the ring signal Also change the setting for Modem Use IRQ Disabled Choose this if the power is not turned on using the ring signal 5 14 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Table 5 5 Power Management Setup menu continued Items Resume by Alarm Alarm Date of Month Time hh mm ss Alarm Description Use this setting to turn on the power with the alarm date and time Set Resume by Alarm to the desired setting to enable or disable this function Enabled Choose this to enable the alarm function By selecting this Date of Month Alarm and Time hh mm ss Alarm can also be set Disabled Choose this to disable the alarm function This is the default setting Use Date of Month Alarm to set the appropriate date Use Time hh mm ss Alarm to set the appropriate time Once the setting is made the power turns on or the system resumes to Full On Mode on the selected day and time each month System Battery Sets the system battery is equipped not equipped The default is Not Equipped
168. ee eae 4 47 KReytOp VIEW 000 ES od ae A A a tes Wg at de Pie Bie ta cae 4 47 Printing the Settings eneon a oot ak ias pete iia en ADEE Rete ae ast lead 4 47 EA ET ani tease Rie A a aly at A E 4 47 Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 6 00 cece eee eee 4 48 FunctiOns 3065 A fo ey ale Le te ee ew al Wet tee ise inte ba a Ses 4 48 Startup it Pete tae ainviog te E E tees MiGs A E asa Ss 4 48 Setting Flia be os aceite a Thetis at an in as 4 49 Logon Tool for Windows XP 2000 NT ooooccccccoccccccrrnn rr 4 50 Stallone 4 51 FOWO Use Lai o elt AUS PE a O OR a tdo 4 51 EPSON ORLOSADRK monea a a e E AA AAT Sea a cand dia 4 52 Creating the Component Software ooooocccccoronnccrrr rr 4 52 Software Standardization 0 ccc ce te teen en en e E EUREI e TISEI E 4 53 EPSON Sot Waters a a alban saci geet 4 53 Keyboard Firmware Setting Utility for MS DOS 0 rr 4 53 Starts tt a bak ota dence bg AA A AA E aan eee 4 53 Processing Details cia deine oe ie Pad REN ne A een eld oe dees 4 56 Me ssages ct ld ld a eo Pre oleae stan 4 56 28 Key Configuration Utility for MS DOS 0 6 4 58 O O ee ans aa Te Bt aoa hee eh REN oe NN 4 58 Howto Operation as atta tebe bbe cava eet Pek vera Sean es ot hie tes 4 59 Listof Definable Keys vis ia ini Sate Sata hah ero Lela we dd Senate ane bas Saeed Lawes eh See Ges 4 60 84 key Configuration Utility for MS DOS 6 ccc eee teen nnn 4 61 x
169. ee eda oh 1 1 TR 320Reatures icccu e e oe nerd bei Sete eis be ias 1 1 Part Names cuido A a An Bae a hth Rte LNG OIA aod donc RA da eh Pe wes 1 3 DM LR121Series LCD Display Unit sciri keneen e i e E N eens 1 3 DM LR104T LCD Display Unit oooooccccccocnncccrrr rn 1 4 CD ROM CD R RW Drive OI R06 0 een rrer 1 5 Front CompactFlash Drive OI RO7 0 0 6 6c rar rr 1 5 Connector Names curia oo ace Pend da Rage ee hh e cee hase AAA AE Eda STR Me dab ct Ses 1 6 Hardware Configurations unta poi GN ule sate Lg ied has ae Pearle als 1 7 Model Configurations ri tit ake gl dagen Add Vi 1 7 Operation Testing Products for IR 1 06 rr rr 1 8 Software Configurations 242 22 A Lee ee eee A Loa ad ae Seek ad ed 1 9 BIOS Setup and Self Diagnosis Functions 0 066 e eens 1 9 Operating Systems skerm ta ss e a da angie ne ina od helt DE dae 1 9 Utilities tt A ee ee 1 9 Operation Modes ones t3seh say A EA as oe de oe ae Seat ia ls 1 10 1 Mechanical Off Mode 0 cece eee ee cee rr 1 10 2 SCO MO Gis ie de nak And Gn ca E ia 1 10 3 Full On Mode scrire fos Me eG hid PEA Ls Be PE A es RE 1 10 4 Video Off Mode secu a aid fad 1 10 5 Suspend Mode ii A a a 1 11 Jumper Locations and Settings sieeve eee vee h oes eee oe etna ed e ven a pe Ae oe 1 13 Main Board JUM pers iii O A FUG Swe alt aa one pedis 1 13 POS 320 Board Jumpers 10 a et ethene i E hw ied A Reh 1 15 PUN CHIONIS OS WZ rats atar blo Bb Vda ati
170. eft tabs on the IR 320 with the right and left grooves in the back of the LCD unit When both sides are engaged slide the LCD unit down on the back groove in the LCD unit tab on the IR 320 SON 7 The LCD unit has a 34 pin connector cable and a 38 pin connector cable Attach the ferrite core an accessory of the IR 320 to the 34 pin connector cable ferrite core 2 28 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 8 Connect the cables for the LCD unit to the connectors layout of the connectors CN51 CN31 38 pin CN35 34 pin JP1 e Jumper Switch POS board 9 Check the Jumper Switch setting For the DM LR104T 252 set the JP1 to 1 2 and for the DM LR104T 052 set the JP1 to 2 3 Q Note If the jumper is incorrectly set the LCD display is not correct 10 Return the lock knob under the LCD unit to the lock position 11 Install the printer unit or the printer tray and lock it with two screws 12 Reattach the side cover Rev C Setup 2 29 Confidential Removing the LCD Unit The removal procedure for the LCD depends on the type of LCD unit DM LR121Series 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector ml printer cable
171. en Enter Installing a dedicated AC Line tool Windows 2000 98 The AC Line Tool is used to send a notification to the application that the system power has been changed from the AC Line to the battery drive in Windows 2000 98 Installing a dedicated APM driver Windows NT Only When using the battery unit with Windows NT install the dedicated APM driver included with the battery unit Q Power Management Driver APM2 0 for Windows NT Refer to Chapter 4 Utilities for the installation procedure 2 42 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installing a 28 Key Keyboard Unit DM K028 The 28 Key Keyboard unit is an optional input device for the IR 320 It has 28 keys in total 4 columns by 7 lines The function of each key can be freely assigned by software By assigning the same function to more than one key these keys can be used as one large key This keyboard also can be used in connection with a magnetic stripe reader MSR Q Note The software stored on the floppy disk is for the IR 300 So do not use it for this system Operation progress 1 Confirm that OS is installed 2 Change the key top and the key top cover of the 28 Key Keyboard unit 3 Set up the 28 Key Keyboard unit to the IR 320 main unit 4 Turn the power of the IR 320 on and install the K B firmware relation utility 5 Using the utility set the key definition and write the setting contents to the K B firmware The sett
172. en starting Layer Switching Method _ Shift key type Change Layer Key It is possible to set a single change layer key for each layer a total of 3 keys If multiple change layer keys are pressed at the same time the change layer key that was pressed last becomes the enabled key Notes a The layer returns to Layer 0 when the change layer key is released after being pressed In the case of changing a layer other than 0 using the software as the same method it returns to Layer 0 without returning the layer set with the software In case multiple change layer keys are pressed when any change layer keys are released the layer returned 0 not to change the layer is pressing Under this case when the layer is changed using the software it returned Layer 0 at the same time of other change layer keys are released In the previous 28 key definition utility and 84 key definition key keys are defined with respect to Layer 0 when starting so if a layer other than Layer 0 is set keys are not input The KeyLock key can be operated without relation to the layer function If the layer function is not being used use the layer 28 key definition utility and leave the change layer keys unset Software Configuration Layer 28 key Definition Utility 28KYCFGL EXE Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for Windows PKLDL32 EXE Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for MS DOS PKLDL EXE Layer Switching and Reading Library Windows
173. ent pressing of Ctrl Alt Del Ctrl Esc or Alt Tab cannot be defined Any other key definition utility cannot be programmed together with this utility Do not operate the mouse the touch panel the keyboard or any other inputting device while the program of this utility is being executed Startup The 28 Key Definition utility 28KEYCFG EXE has been copied in the directory as specified in the installation procedure If the directory is not specified this utility is copied in the c Program Files Key config directory This utility can be started by either of the following methods LY Double click 28KEYCFG EXE in Windows Explorer LI Select Keyboard Config Utilities and then 28 Keyboard Configuration Utility from the Program menu Rev C Utilities 4 17 When the program starts the Startup screen is displayed Speed Button The speed button menu which is composed of 12 buttons is displayed under the title bar of the 28 Key Definition utility The function to be executed can be quickly called by pressing this speed button Exit Load Code Font Prog View New Save Label Color ave Prog Print All Exit Exits the 28 Key Definition utility New Clears the button s function and creates a new setting Load Loads a saved setting Save Saves the current setting Code Opens the KeyCode dialog box Label Opens the KeyLabel dialog box Font Opens the Font dialog box Color Opens the Color Specification dialog box Prog One Program
174. eo Driver Installation Install the Video Driver from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Chipset Driver Installation Install the Chipset Driver from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Network Driver Installation Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Touch Panel Driver Installation Install the Touch Panel Driver from the CD ROM for the IR 320 r a P I Serial port Driver Installation I I Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 I AC line tool Installation When using the Battery Unit OI R03 install the software from the Driver l CD ROM for the IR 320 Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 3 26 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Setup procedure Windows XP is set up by using the following procedure 1 2 6 Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IR 320 Insert the CD ROM of Windows XP in the CD ROM drive and boot up the system The Welcome to Setup screen is displayed Press Enter The END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT screen is displayed Read it through and confirm contents If you agree with them press the F8 key Select the partition to set up Windows and press Enter When an unformatted partition is selected a confirmation screen is displayed Execute the format according to the instructions on the screen After th
175. er supply cut Other Key lock 7 positions Front lock Available e Dimension 252x386x261 lt Mass 6 7kg e Case color EPSON cool white lt B 2 The IR 310 Compared to the IR 320 Rev C Hardware Configuration IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item IR 310 IR 320 Compatible Main board Available Available No POS board Available Available No Riser board Available Available No LVDS board Available Not available No Power suply with AC Available Available Yes outlet and fuse Jumper and Switch Settings Item IR 310 IR 320 Main Board RTC and CMOS clear JP5 COM Port power JP7 to JP18 output TM reset polarity JP31 settings TM customer disolay JP32 flow control POS 320 LVDS TM reset enable JP3 Board disable setting for RTS and DTR DIP switch settings for DSW1 DSW1 keyboard controller SWI Start up mode SW4 Start up mode SW2 to 4 Country settings SW1 to 3 Country settings Default setting Default setting OFF OFF OFF US mode OFF OFF OFF US mode Ethernet setting JP1 None Upper Surface LCD setting Jumper JP1 Jumper Switch JP1 1 2 DM LR104T 252 DM LR104SV DM LR121SV XG 2 3 DM LR104T 052 DM LR104 2 DM LR104T 252 DM LR121SV 2 3 DM LR104T 052 Rear Sueface Customer display loop back setting Jumper of over the power supply fan Switch SW2 of the POS 320 board rear panel Rev C The IR
176. es 0 Luid tkPriv Privileges 0 Attributes SE_PRIVILEGE_ENABLED AdjustTokenPrivileges htkProcess FALSE amp tkPriv 0 NULL NULL ExitWindowsEx EWX_POWEROFE 0 break default return DefWindowProc hWnd Message wParam lParam return OL Utilities 4 75 AC Line Tool For Windows 2000 98 The AC Line Tool is used to send a notification to the application that the system power has been changed from the AC Line to the battery drive in Windows 2000 98 When the optional battery unit OI R03 021 is attached if the AC Line is cut due to a power cut the power is changed to be supplied by the battery unit When this happens the tool displays a message that encourages the user to save the data at the application side and the tool enables programming to exit the application Q Note This tool cannot be used in Windows NT Installation Q Note Only a user who has administrative authority can install it Follow the steps below for the installation 1 Execute C backup epsbatt Epsbatt exe The Welcome dialog appears Click Next 2 When the installation is finished the Reboot dialog appears Select Yes I want to restart my computer now and click Finish 3 The system is rebooted and the tool is automatically started Uninstallation Follow the steps below for uninstallation 1 Open Control Panel 2 Select Add Remove Applications 3 Select EPSON AC Line watching from the list of software installe
177. es disables the emulation functions for the USB keyboard The default setting is Disabled AC97 Audio This setting enables disables the audio controller housed in the chip set ICH2 The default setting is Auto Perform setting using or not using the audio controller according to your system configuration Auto Choose this if the audio controller built in the chip set ICH2 is used Disabled Choose this if the audio controller built in the chip set ICH2 is not used The IRQ resources for the audio controller are allocated if the Auto setting is selected they are not allocated if the Disabled setting is selected Rev C 5 11 BIOS Functions Table 5 7 Integrated Peripherals menu continued Items Description Onboard LAN This setting enables disables the network controller housed in the chip set ICH2 Device The default setting is Enabled Perform setting using or not using the network controller according to your system configuration Enabled Choose this if the network controller built in the chip set ICH2 is used Disabled Choose this if the network controller built in the chip set ICH2 is not used The IRQ resources for the network controller are allocated as follows Enabled PnP BIOS automatically allocates IRQ resources Disabled IRQ resources are not allocated IDE HDD Block This setting enables disables the IDE HDD multi sector transfer mode Mode The default setting is Enable
178. es for the 84 key Keyboard DM KR084 These utilities are used to define the keys for the 84 key keyboard write them into the keyboard firmware and create definition files Utility Utility name OS Page 84 key definition utility 84KEYCFG EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 98 4 43 84 key definition utility POSKB EXE MS DOS 4 61 Other Keyboard Firmware Related Utilities These utilities are used to write definition files into the keyboard firmware and rewrite the keyboard firmware Utility Utility name OS Page Definition data automatic setting utility PKLD32 EXE Windows XP 2000 NT 98 4 48 Definition data automatic setting utility PKLOAD EXE MS DOS 4 67 Firmware rewriting tool PKUPDT2 EXE MS DOS 4 67 Power Management Related Utilities These utilities are used to set the save electric power mode and the power management function to extend the parts lifetime Utility Utility name OS Page Power Management Driver APM2 0 APM32 EXE Windows NT 4 71 AC Line tool EPSBATT EXE Windows XP 2000 4 76 Power button tool DISSW EXE Windows 2000 98 4 78 Utilities Rev C Logon Keyboard IR 320 Technical Reference Manual This utility is used to log on to the OS without connecting the keyboard and the mouse Utility Logon Tool Utility name OS Actinkey Logonkey Windows 2000 NT Page 4 50 Utilities for the Front CompactFlash Adapter These
179. et Driver must be installed before you install other drivers This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2KA ChipsetMinfinst_enu EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome screen is displayed Click Next The License Agreement screen is displayed Click Yes The Readme Information dialog box is displayed Click Next Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the Intel chipset driver Uninstalling cannot be done Installing the Network Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Network pro2kxpm exe The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next The Location to Save Files dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C IntelPRO When copying of the file is completed the following dialog box is displayed Click Install now N FILE EXTRACTION IS COMPLETE El PRO2KXP EXE This file Relnotes rtf is stored in the root of the archive extraction Requirements Installation Upgrade of Drivers Troubleshooting Installation PROSet IT Available Downloads OSs User Guides Additional Fe
180. eyboard configuration utility Clears the button s function and creates a new setting Loads a saved setting Saves the current setting Opens the key label dialog box Opens the key code dialog box Opens the color dialog If you click this button while another button is selected the utility programs only the key for the selected button The utility programs settings of all the buttons Opens the key view window and displays the keytops Prints the current settings Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Key Definitions The keys on the screen correspond to the actual keytops on the keyboard unit You define the keytops using the following steps 1 2 3 Click the key you want to code and it becomes selected Clicking it again cancels the selection Click the Code button to open the key code dialog box EeyCode Input the code for the selected key from the keyboard You can enter a code up to a maximum of 64 bytes When you select a key if you hold down the Shift key and click the key immediately to the right of or immediately below the selected key the two keys are connected By repeating this procedure a number of keys can be connected to create one large key If you press the Shift key while the connected key is selected the connection is canceled If you click the OK button the setting is made and the key code dialog is closed If you click the Cancel button the setting is canceled If
181. fferences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value calculated according to information obtained by the device is displayed Manual The value calculated according to information specified by the user is displayed Cylinder This item indicates the number of cylinders for the connection device The following differences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS Head This item indicates the number of heads for the connection device The following differences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 255 only when the access method is set as CHS Preomp This item indicates the number of write compensation cylinders for the connection device The following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS When connecting a device for which there is no particular value specified a maximum value of 65 535 is specified 5 19 BIOS Functions Rev C Item Landing Zone Options Noti
182. fied the SRAM values from zz00h to zzFFh are displayed More than one parameter can be specified together however the parameters with and the parameters without cannot be specified together Rev C Utilities 4 55 The parameters are analyzed and executed one by one When an invalid parameter is specified an error to that effect is displayed and the next parameter is analyzed Even if an error is caused the processing does not cease The value set under this command is written into the K B firm unless it is in the CMDOFF status therefore the setting cannot be deleted by turning on the power Processing Details The version is displayed as Firmware Version V3 00 To obtain detailed version information execute PKUPDT2 EXE Q Note This utility is started from and executed on MS DOS It cannot be executed from the DOS box This utility uses the K B interface for communication with the firmware For this reason do not operate the 28 key keyboard the KeyLock and the MSR as well as the external keyboard during the execution or an error is caused during the data communication and this utility cannot start in order Do not reset the system or switch the power supply off when this utility is in operation When the CMDOFF is set the command cannot be executed unless it is reset or the power to the main body is turned off Messages The following message is displayed when the utility starts EPSON POS Keyboar
183. following BIOS related utilities This chapter describes the BIOS setup utility and Power on self test POST L BIOS setup T Power on self test POST I Device diagnostic utility See Chapter 6 Restrictions When using Windows 2000 the quitting of the application and the Auto Shutdown of OS cannot be done by using the Power Status Change Notification The AC Line Tool utility is provided to send a notification to the application that the system power has been changed from the AC Line to the battery drive See Chapter 4 Utility for details HDD Power Down Timer Setting The HDD Power Down Timer settings are made through the OS in Windows XP 2000 98 but in Windows NT 95 and DOS the settings are made through the BIOS as detailed below To have the HDD motor stop when the HDD is not accessed for a certain time follow the steps below 1 Start up the BIOS Setup Utility 2 Select Power Management Setup 3 Select HDD Power Down 4 Select the time in the option 5 Saveit and restart After the restart when there is no HDD access for the time set the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops Y Note This function can be used only with BIOS version 2 11 02 or higher If your BIOS version is before 2 11 01 upgrade the BIOS and then do the above procedure When access to HDD occurs the motor of HDD begins to start and the HDD becomes accessible Rev C 5 1 BIOS F
184. from the connector 4 Thread the two cables for the LCD unit through the hole in the center of the IR 320 Rev C Setup 2 25 Confidential 5 Engage the right and left tabs on the IR 320 with the right and left grooves in the back of the LCD unit When both sides are engaged slide the LCD unit down while pressing the lock lever on the left side of the LCD unit groove in the LCD unit tab on the IR 320 6 The LCD unit has a 34 pin connector cable and a 38 pin connector cable Attach the ferrite core an accessory of the IR 320 to the 34 pin connector cable layout of the connectors CN51 CN31 38 pin CN35 34 pin JP1 POS board 8 Check the Jumper Switch setting For the DM LR121SV DM LR121SL set the JP1 to 1 2 9 Install the printer unit or the printer tray and lock it with two screws 10 Reattach the side cover 2 26 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual DM LR104T 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector 4 Set the lock knob under the LCD unit to the release position Rev C Setup 2 27 Confidential 5 Thread the two cables for the LCD unit through the hole in the center of the IR 320 6 Engage the right and l
185. g cannot be used 5 12 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Table 5 7 Integrated Peripherals menu continued Items Description Parallel Port This setting sets the parallel port mode The default setting is Normal Mode There are 4 options Normal EPP ECP and ECP EPP Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration Note that since an 8 byte continuous I O space is needed when using the EPP setting and ECP EPP setting the 3BC IRQ7 setting cannot be used In addition a DMA channel number is required for the DMA transfer when using the ECP setting and ECP EPP setting The definitions for each mode are listed below Normal Also called the SPP Standard Parallel Port this mode is for one direction only EPP EPP stands for Enhanced Parallel Port and is an improvement for the Normal mode I O throughput EPP allows for faster data transfer than Normal mode ECP ECP stands for Extended Capabilities Port and it is a mode that supports DMA transfer and Run Length Enhanced ECP allows for faster data transfer EPP Mode EPP Mode Select sets the type of EPP mode The default setting is EPP1 7 Select There are 2 options the EPP1 7 setting and the EPP1 9 setting Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration ECP Mode Use Sets the DMA channel number for the ECP and ECP EPP setting DMA The default setting is 3 There a
186. g procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs 2 The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON Serial Driver is selected Click Change Remove The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes 4 The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box is displayed The uninstall process then begins 5 A dialog box is displayed when uninstall is completed Click OK AC line tool This tool is the utility to monitor the switching of the power of the system over to the battery from the AC Line with Windows 2000 when the battery unit OI R03 option is attached For details see page 4 67 Power button prohibited setting tool for windows 2000 The Power button prohibited setting tool is the tool setting the registry to prohibit the shift to the shutdown and the stand by mode even if the front power switch is pressed It can prevent the shutdown of the system even if the front power switch is pressed by mistake Note for using When Power Options of Windows are updated the setting is cleared so always set after updating the Power Options 3 10 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual How to use 1 2 Execute C Backup Dissw DISSW EXE The following message is displayed Click Yes If No is clicked processing stops and you return to Win
187. g to be enabled the manufacturer recommends that the transmission buffer size be less than 16 bytes L The Customer Display is still controlled by hardware handshaking DTR DSR Q Notes You cannot use RTS CTS handshaking to control the TM printer The Customer Display is set to DTR DSR to keep it from going BUSY Appendix C 2 Serial Handshaking Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The illustration below shows the final electrical connection With Jumper JP32 on the POS Board OPEN Device Settings When Software Requires XON XOFF Handshaking with Jumper JP32 Shorted To set XON XOFF handshaking check that the IR 320 and the TM Printer use the following settings m m m m m Handshaking for the TM xxR Printer should be set to XON XOFF Set DIP switch 1 3 of the TM xxR Printer to ON The default setting is OFF Set Jumper JP32 on the POS board to SHORTED This is the default setting The recommended setting for the Windows FIFO buffer is disabled This prevents timing delays caused by the data being held in the buffer If customers want the setting to be enabled the manufacturer recommends that the transmission buffer size be less than 16 bytes The Customer Display is still controlled by hardware handshaking RTS CTS Q Notes You cannot use DTR DSR handshaking to control the TM Printer The Customer Display is set to RTS CTS to keep it from going BUSY Rev C Serial Handshaking Appendi
188. g work for matching the physical position where the operator presses the touch panel with the software position recognized by the computer Rev C OS and Drivers 3 57 The touch panel calibration is executed when the touch point of the touch panel is displayed The touch panel calibration on Windows is executed by using the following procedure 1 Start Windows 2 Select Programs EPSON Touch Panel Tool Touch Panel Configuration Tool in that order from the Start menu 3 The EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool starts Click the Calibration tab EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool 4 Click Calibration Start The calibration screen is displayed and a mark is displayed in the top left corner of the screen 5 Press the mark s intersection point on the screen The mark will then move to the top center of the screen 6 Hereafter press the mark s intersection point on the screen The mark is thus displayed consecutively in 9 places top left top center top right left center center right center bottom left bottom center bottom right Click Cancel to cancel the calibration operation 7 The calibration is completed when all the intersection points at all 9 places have been pressed Click OK to close the EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool 3 58 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Touch Panel Configuration Tool The touch panel configuration tool can set the detailed ite
189. gned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 9 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 10 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 11 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 12 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 14 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 15 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA O assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA 1 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA 3 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA 5 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA 6 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA DMA 7 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA Notes When Resources Controlled By is set to Manual IRQ Resources DMA Resources ANd Memory Resources Can be set by the user Rev C 5 29 BIOS Functions Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Reserved Memory Base N A N A N A DOOO Reserved Memory Length 64K 64K 64K PCI VGA Palette Snoop Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Notes When Memory Resource is selected Reserved Memory Base and Reserved Memory Size can be set from the advanced settings screen For Reserved Memory Base N A and D000 can be selected from the option settings For Rese
190. h is pressed by mistake Note on using When Power Options of Windows are updated the setting is cleared so always set after updating the Power Options How to use 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Dissw DISSW EXE 3 52 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 2 The following message is displayed Click Yes If No is clicked installation stops and you are Rev C returned to Windows Registry setting When setting the registry the following message is displayed Click Yes so Windows is restarted and the setting becomes valid If you click No the setting returns to Windows without becoming valid In this case when you restart Windows the setting becomes valid Registry setting 2 CE te OS and Drivers 3 53 Installation for MS DOS Locally Procured Version Installation Procedure If you install MS DOS Locally procured version follow the steps below Operating System Installation Insert the MS DOS startup disk and turn on the IR 320 to perform the Setup As for the installation procedure refer to the MS DOS manual CD ROM Driver Installation As for installing MS DOS only the CD ROM drive for the IR 320 is not recognized Therefore by using other PC to read the CD ROM install the CD ROM driver in the IR 320 after copying the CD ROM driver on the floppy disk from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Network Driver Installation
191. h position of the key lock Start The Key Lock Setting utility KYLCKCFG EXE has been registered in the following directory in the initial setting C Program Files Key Config This utility can be started by either of the following methods 3 Double click Kylckcfg EXE on Explorer LI Select Keyboard Config Utilities and then Keylock Configuration Utility from the Program menu 4 12 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual When the program starts the Startup screen is displayed Speed Buttons Y Keylock Configuration Utility ag i uz a The speed button menu which is composed of eight buttons is displayed under the title bar of the Key Lock Setting utility Click these speed buttons to call up the desired function quickly Exit New Load Save Code Label Prog One Prog All Exit Load Code Prog One New Save Label Prog All Exits the Key Lock Setting utility Clears the button s function and creates a new setting Loads a saved setting Saves the current setting Opens the KeyCode dialog box Opens the KeyLabel dialog box If you click this button while a key is selected only the code for the selected key is programmed Programs the settings of all the keys Utilities 4 13 Rev C Key Definitions Each key on the screen corresponds with each key position of the manager key For defining each key use the following procedure 1 Click the key you want to set to
192. he applicable PCI boards are as follows 135 mm 5 3 or less 101 mm 4 01 orless 2 60 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual ZN CAUTION Before installing the PCI board carefully confirm that it operates normally Follow the procedure below to install a PCI board A CAUTION Before setup discharge static electricity on your body If you do not discharge static electricity trouble could result Touch a grounded metal surface to allow static electricity to discharge 1 Do not touch the connectors Dirt may cause a malfunction T Donot apply excessive force to connectors cables and screws during connection Excessive force may damage the connection parts or screw threads 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the side panel Rev C Setup 2 61 Confidential 4 7 8 Remove the retaining screw securing the slot cover Keep the screw to secure the PCI board Save the PCI slot cover Push the board in firmly but carefully to insert it fully You should feel the connectors fit into place If the board does not go in smoothly do not force it pull it all the way out and try again Lock the PCI board with the screws removed in step 4 Reattach the side panel with two screws Reattach the side cover When you remove the PCI board be sure to attach a slot cover Installing a Customer Display The following customer displays can
193. he backup file is witten in the K B firmware with the definition data automatic setting utility This way the same setting can be used for more than one system to make a setup and it can be used as a batch file 2 46 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The definition data automatic setting utility The Windows vertion the MS DOS version Using the layer function The 28 key definition utility compatible with the layer The 28 key automatic definition utility compatible with the layer for Windows version The 28 key automatic definition utility compatible with the layer for MS DOS version C oO O O The library for changing and reading the layer Rev C Setup 2 47 Confidential Installing the MSR Unit DM MR123 The LCD unit the 84 key keyboard unit and the 28 Key Keyboard unit are equipped with an interface for connecting the MSR Usable magnetic cards ISO 7811 JIS X6301 type I track 1 2 and 3 Q Note While inputting data from the input devices connected to the keyboard interface such as the external keyboard and the POS keyboard do not input data from the 28 Key Keyboard unit or the MSR unit ESN Note The software stored on the floppy disk is for the IR 300 So do not use it for this system Operation progress 1 Confirm that OS is installed 2 Setup the MSR unit to the IR 320 main unit There is a way of attaching to the LCD unit and a way of to the 28 Key Keyboard unit
194. he loop back connector To execute the loop back test for the serial ports and LPT1 connect the loop back connector to the port to be tested Setting of the serial ports and LPT port When the settings of the serial ports and LPT1 port have been changed return to the initial settings using the BIOS setup utility 6 2 Device Diagnostics Utility COM port loop back connector 1 DCD powere 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 DIR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS LPT loop back connector 1 STROBE 2D0 3D1 4D2 5 D3 6 D4 7D5 8 D6 9D7 10 ACK 11 BUSY 12 PE 13 SLCT 14 AFD 15 ERR 16 INIT 17 SLCTIN 18 GND 19 GND 20 GND 21 GND 22 GND 23 GND 24 GND 25 GND vy 4454117 Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Startup Exit Initialize Startup Press F10 during the POST process and the message Diagnostics program will execute after POST will appear and the device self diagnostic utility will start after the POST process Exit When you select Exit from the menu the device diagnostics utility is closed and the IR 320 is reset Initialize When you select Initialize from the menu bar the device self diagnostic utility is initialized If the TM status message column in the TM Drawer area or the DM status message column in the DM area shows No communication remove the cause and select Initialize to initialize the program Screen Layout When the device diagnostic
195. he settings are available Clicking No returns to Windows without the settings being available In this case if you reboot Windows the settings are available Registry setting 2 To finish setting you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer now BaySwap Once you install the BaySwap software you can insert and remove CompactFlash cards while the IM 320 is in operation BaySwap can only be used under Windows NT The software must first be installed from the floppy disk supplied if it is to be used 4 78 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual After installation the BaySwap icon will reside in the task bar as shown below when Windows NT is booted BaySwap POET 28 Operation procedure Check to ascertain that reading and writing is not being performed on the compact flash before detaching it 1 Perform a left hand click on the icon in the task bar and then click on Change device in Swappabe Bay Change device in Svappabe Bay 2 1 10 PM 2 The following dialog box will be displayed Attach or detach the card at this point j You may safely iemave oi raninda Be devico mite Hite Bay row Please press OK afier removing cr ieplacing the devices 3 Click on the OK button once the card has been attached or detached Rev C Utilities 4 79 4 80 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Chapter 5 BIOS Functions The IR 320 system ROM stores the
196. hing a Power Cable sio dit A Rn hed A EA id 2 69 Installing Peripheral Devices to the COM Port ocoococcccccoccncccr rr rr 2 70 O A ati ale Wad de remaden tee Rot EAE ARA TE Da 2 70 Printing Using Windows si pin cad eed DA de bo A ta 2 72 Chapter 3 OS and Drivers Outline of This Chapter a nla ae aetna hatin kee oh ee Tea 3 1 Operating Systems id caida et ee a tapa Rie 3 1 Drivers and Utilities a A dc ah ah bk da atadas 3 1 Windows 2000 Pre Installed Model 3 4 Installation Procedure A a Aah GS AA O La dd 3 4 Directory Configurationy 22 2 x qs diay mec EA AE A RR eae OS 3 6 Windows 2000 Setup Procedure 0 eee EAEE RENTE A ee 3 7 Setting the recognition range of the double click 6 cee eee 3 8 Various Configurations Windows 2000 6 6 cece een eee e ees 3 8 Setting the Network ier ritinn pa 08 Cig ep ted A it he tad 3 8 EPSON Sera DIVER fates oo cso eats a a Walch ad fee Hang A CR eee a 3 10 AC TING BOOL chines ete TAREA DEE EID e A iby AEE ha EA COR IER ER a ENE IEA a 3 10 Power button prohibited setting tool for windows 2000 0 cece cece eee eee 3 10 Adding Windows 2000 Applications 0ooooocccrrronnccnrrra eee 3 11 Support Information 3 oe ae aed ee a OIG oe ae iN a aH ae ee a pe 3 12 Recovering the OS ute nee oak Slee nd ceded oh Cope eg age ce eee gee Mead any hated eae ates 3 13 Windows NT Pre Installed Model 3 15 Installation Procedure 0 4 ina BG Meek A Sethe glen tack shape boa c
197. hut Down and then select Standby in the Shut Down dialog In Windows NT do not set up Suspend because the system clock is delayed Type of OS Setup method for time of transfer to suspend mode Windows XP Set with Power Management property System Standby Windows 2000 Set with Power Management property System Standby Windows NT Do not set up Windows 98 Set with Power Management property System Standby MS DOS Set with BIOS Suspend Timer In the suspend mode the mode is immediately reset to the full on mode when input is received from the keyboard mouse HDD FDD or touch panel Also the suspend mode is always changed to the full on mode when the soft power switch is pressed regardless of the BIOS switch setting Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 11 The status transition between each operation mode is as follows errr etree te rr a oo TP s o na nnnno noo Sey Anessa ees ene eens Pha Say os ere eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee Dia a Main power switch on b Main power switch off or power off forced by AC power cutoff c Soft power switch on wake up request signal received from the LAN or ring signal from the modem d System shutdown by software The operation differs depending on the dedicated APM driver setting See Chapter 4 Utility and forced power off by pressing the soft power switch if the dedicated APM driver
198. i A ee ee 4 21 Saving th Settings at wi A EER es 4 22 Loading the Settings ritet ae E abe bd wiht tee a pe es eA 4 22 Newa diareea aa Raabe n A A A 4 22 Displaying th Key Top ius sis esas ob eee A Ok E Sn Sas Saw EAS te a eid A aS 4 23 ENTE A ES hated ate A Boas Rte tb aad Soca A Maat wats bate a ate A beds 4 23 List of Definable Keys socero fad eee Ae he eee ead aie ots ein ab ee ane cee be eet 4 23 Layer 28 key Keyboard Definition Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT and Windows 98 4 25 Quiet thing alate ad caries Re See Ee ae Se e LAN ty Lies a Oe 4 25 Software Configuration s ispis esis as a walen yae Ea NEA E aa HG Cie ae gk Dea esi oP a a 4 26 Installation Procedure imei ata aaa 4 27 Uninstall Procedure 0 0 6 0 cn nee n eben rererere tenet n eens 4 28 Setting the Utility vacia A he ROSH cee ae EG E iio 4 30 84 key Configuration Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 ooooocccocococcccroonacrrr 4 43 A EEE TATT BG Rabat E dros cabaee Le hg Rose Beas hae a EO ETNE 4 43 Speed Buttons sereme Me inden DAA ASA EA Glee ses oie bes Sea es 4 44 Key Definitions ic eed sah the cca tated nh Coke ag Ue oe ee eae Dsl hanya tee oad lcd 4 45 Setting the Key Label inician ii Heese te hee oe Hee hed We ees ee a ed eek eee ae 4 45 Keytop C olor S tein gs vila its A A as OE he NE a 4 46 Key Pros O 4 46 Saving the Settings san ad Micah A vale Ra ee aa 4 46 hoadingsthe Settings 2 4 isis tle da Aa 4 46 IN GWiis ices a O aa RO a Anas Suess
199. ialog box is displayed asking you to reconfirm whether to delete the shared files click the Yes button Remove Shared File You have chosen to remove all shared components which the system indicates are no longer being used This may cause some programs not to function if they still require any of these files Are you sure you want to proceed 8 The following dialog box is displayed and the uninstall process is completed Click the OK button Remove Programs From Your Computer x unlnstallShield will remove the software 28 K B Config Utilities 4 Layers Supported for Windows NT from your computer Please wait while each of the following components is removed Y Shared program files Standard program files Folder items Program folders Program directories NON NAN Program registry entries Setting the Utility Layer 28 key Definition Utility The Layer 28 key Definition Utility can define the keys of the 28 key keyboard unit in Windows Setting of codes for the 28 key keyboard can be done for layers 0 3 a total of 4 layers Notes A Be careful of the following points when using this utility 4 30 Utilities Rev C Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The Shift Ctrl and Alf keys cannot be registered independently Register them in combination with other keys The NumLock ScrollLock Pause and CapsLock keys cannot be registered Pressing of the Windows key Menu
200. ice is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS When connecting a device for which there is no particular value specified a maximum value of 65 535 is specified Landing Zone This item indicates the head fixed track number for the connection device Th following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS When connecting a device for which there is no particular value specified the number 1 is specified as the maximum number of cylinders Sector This item indicates the number of sectors for the connection device The following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 255 only when the access method is set as CHS Drive A Drive A type is set The definition for each setting is as follows None This setting is used when the FDD is disconnected or when the FDD is not loaded Please note that when this setting is used system resources such as the IRQ cannot be opened When you want to open the system resources when using this setting select Disabled under Integrated Peripherals Onboard FDC
201. ies Bead Beal a us eras ae TDA ds 3 15 Directory Configuration pes sides tse E A Sls Da ew META AY Ute ees A SES 3 16 Windows NT Setup Procedure 2 6 ccc tenet een nee eens 3 17 Adding the Windows NT Applications oooocccococccccrroraccr rre 3 17 Support Information A A A Ried pao bad Saag eles 3 18 Recovering tHE OS E E 224 hat os T EEEE eid 3 19 Windows 98 Pre Installed Model 3 21 Installation Procedure ia eee a Behe ain AA feta sada sens 3 21 Directory Configuration ci ee ee Ped oe eGo ts oes eal Sin See ae Ba See we we 3 22 Windows 98 Set Up Proc duire sucia cia cs depeche a peed ek eee a ea eww Leek a de es 3 23 Recovering the OS iii O id canine ee Heeger Pad vide Sate RE Sek Reet Bis 3 24 Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installation for Windows XP Professional Locally Procured Edition 6 0 cece eee eens 3 26 Installation Procedure iii a Ee SEN AON VEDEA 3 26 Installing the Intel Chipset Diver scs essor ese eni ede ats need a ees shld ees dea 3 28 Installing the Network Driver ig 2 6 en cep Rie ii 3 28 Installing the Touch Panel Driver 0 6 c cece nett eens 3 29 Installing the Serial Port Driver ovino a otis Gee eee 3 29 Installing the AGC line tO0L msc tees eis ah hah Mate e dra abel dena eles 3 30 Installation for Windows 2000 Professional Locally Procured Edition 0 0 cece eee eee 3 31 Installation Proce GUre mymer csi a Sede glib eek ded SOL SE OF N
202. ii Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Start Sie Bow syste ates HAG et AD Aol A AE te AEROS Re BONE BD ADE 4 62 Basic pera 4ions sses E Ses en wed ee hed eas He ee an ned A ey oes aed ees aes 4 62 Ele COMMAND a Sa edie decd tr Bats Sooke 4 late dota a 4 62 Load Command narea ret seid a Toe hasan bc YES tgs Geico LOND AR RGM nha Ad A 4 63 Save Command 2 is 504 A es Sa Rs BAREIS EEE Lh ABBR 4 63 Edit COMMON ee seen A Ses Ae 4 4 64 Download Command so ice vce ita aaea a o cat e lack fe a Queso sels 4 65 Quit Command ge eda ee ek a faded dane ba Saw Weer Oo eee a eevee ee pierda 4 66 Error Messages sje txt seek e Pees Moe Geter haa ese ea ae ack eae tes 4 66 Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility For MS DOS 0 eee eee 4 67 QUIM sah tae eee a Fos Bit A eee scan dE nda dc LARA ds 4 67 Command eie nen aa a ET ne A ae BR RIA leery ey EO LEED PD ERR RL BE Baa eye Mie ene 4 67 Processing DetallS icc 22 ag edith Ss nt ed day gave ale e E ay aba te Lakh 4 67 Messages toto psi ii Oe bash eet Pak eked g Mabe bes eee SOO ie Reelin pees 4 68 Ending Codes jij A laa 4 69 Pile POrMat UA Dae Sl A A I ARR NA RD de eke 4 69 Code Conversion Entry ti bec ee eee oe See PGS APE Red eel ead Ieee Ree iaa 4 71 Power Management Driver APM2 0 unto nt cd ita tot alt ae RA Rasen leah AE e ae 4 71 Installation ts se ero hee ae ta A ted Ce a Bin aa a ar ear 4 71 Confirmation hice sees he Ss 5 cece A e Shed A ee a ab Redon ah b
203. indows utility folders WINNT Windows folders The 1386 and Drvlib directory may be deleted after the addition of the Windows NT application and the addition change of the driver 3 16 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual The directories under the Backup directory are the backups for drivers and utilities Each of these directories can be backed up into CD R or other media After being backed up these directories may be deleted If you install the optional CD R RW drive you need to get software for CD R RW writing The software is not supplied by EPSON Windows NT Setup Procedure ZN CAUTION Because the touch panel is not operative during the setup procedure be sure to keep the keyboard connected If necessary start the setup procedure after connecting the mouse and the branch cable The keyboard is necessary for inputting the product ID Even when the touch panel is operative the keyboard is also necessary for starting up the Logon process and for authorizing the user through the key operation of CTRL ALT DEL Windows NT is set up by using the following procedure 1 Turn on the system and boot the system from the pre installation HDD Windows NT setup will start 2 The Windows NT Setup dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The License Agreement dialog box is displayed Check the contents then select I accept this agreement and click Next 4 The Name and Organization dialog box is
204. information can be omitted The character code and the key number are in the same format as that of SystemParamxx The concurrent pressing key information can be specified to be Shift Ctrl and Alt CodeDefinitionxx may also be described in more than one file For xx specify the decimal in order from 00 up to 99 CardStart CadEnd Track1Start Track1End Track2Start Track2End Track3Start Track3End JIS2Start and JIS2End are SSs ESs for reading the MSR Normal characters including space can be described as they are Special characters can be described as Xxx where xx is a two digit hexadecimal Specifically line feed tab and back slash may be described as n Mt and respectively The line beginning with is regarded only as a comment line No comment may be described at the right end of the entry line Generally no unnecessary space or tab may be included Logon Tool for Windows XP 2000 NT With the SEGina SEIKO EPSON Image ID Authorization tool the users of Windows XP 2000 and and Windows NT 4 0 can use the software keyboard after logging on off from the software keyboard Data can be input in the windows in execution by clicking with the mouse the specific keys of the software keyboard displayed on the screen The software keyboard can be moved by dragging its upper part Restrictions for Windows 2000 When using the logon tool with Windows 2000 execute the Windows 2000 Service Pack2 and then execute the
205. ing contents can be written and saved as the definition file 6 Now you can use the 28 Key Keyboard unit Setup procedure Follow these steps to install the 28 Key Keyboard unit 1 Remove the connector cover on the right side of the LCD unit If an MSR unit is attached remove it Rev C Setup 2 43 Confidential 2 Connect the 28 Key Keyboard unit to the LCD unit 3 Lock the 28 Key Keyboard unit with the four screws supplied with the 28 Key Keyboard unit ZN CAUTION Do not tighten the screws too tighily If the torque is too strong the screws might be damaged Handling Precaution While inputting data from the input devices connected to the keyboard interface such as the external keyboard and POS keyboard do not input data from the MSR unit connected to the 28 Key Keyboard unit or the 28 Key Keyboard itself 2 44 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Changing a Key Top To change a key top on the keyboard unit use the following procedure 1 Insert the key top remover supplied with the keyboard unit into the key top that is to be removed as shown in the following figure 2 When the key top remover is pulled up the key top comes off 3 To remove more than one key top repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Insert the new key top straight from the top Installing key top covers Key top covers are supplied with the keyboard unit The face of each key top is concave and the cove
206. inue 5 After the OS is recovered set up the OS 6 Return the printer driver for OPOS and Windows saved in Preparing a Recovery Medium Restrictions 1 The size of the image data to be saved amounts to 500 600 MB Saving this much data requires a large capacity device such as a CD R MO or server 1 Because of restrictions by EasyRestore the HD image data file HDIMG003 PQD cannot be divided Because EasyRestore runs only on MS DOS it is a requirement of Saving of HD Image Data that MS DOS can recognize the saving destination device I When startup is initiated from the built in hard disk of the IR 320 recovery is impossible 3 20 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Windows 98 Pre Installed Model The HDD pre installed with Windows 98 Second Edition is also pre installed with the EPSON utility software and drivers dedicated to the IR 320 Languages are English French German Spanish and Italian Installation Procedure Windows 98 Installation When the power supply is turned on the installation starts Enter the product key of the W98 label pasted on the product You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Formatting the hard disk The hard disk is composed of one partition of up to 10 G
207. is port is disabled OK The test completed successfully LPT print Time out The printer connected to the LPT1 port did not enter a ready state after 2 sec Disabled This port is disabled OK The print data was sent successfully Use for the device diagnostic utility Operating Procedure When the device diagnostic utility starts the following screen appears Device tests Initialize Exit Diagnosti rm COM Ports DTR Select TM DM Port 7 ie COM2 COM3 COMS COM6 LPT1 None Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 7 Confidential With the arrow keys gt select the port connected to the TM printer for testing and press Enter The device self diagnostic utility examines items such as the TM and the DM for connection and displays the status of the devices on the screen The device self diagnostic utility is capable of displaying the connection status of the options and executing the operation test Follow these guidelines for using device diagnostics 1 To display a pull down menu use the left or right arrow key gt to highlight the option then press Enter if necessary You also can see the pull down menu if you press the key for the first letter of the option The initialize option does not have a pull down menu 1 To select an option from the pull down menu use the up arrow or down arrow key to highlight the option then press Enter If the option has a dialog box you se
208. is used e Transfer to the video off mode after no input operation for a specified period or selection of video off mode at Operation System f Input operation from keyboard mouse or touch panel Reset by pressing the soft power switch if the dedicated APM driver is used Main power switch off or forced power off because of AC power cutoff h Transfer to suspend mode because of no input operation for a specified period or selection of suspend mode at Operation System i Input operation from keyboard mouse or touch panel Reset by pressing the soft power switch 1 12 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Jumper Locations and Settings Main Board Jumpers The figure below shows the locations of the main board connectors and jumpers JP7 to JP18 JP32 JP31 Primary IDE BATTERY Secondary IDE JP5 82801B Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 13 List of main board jumpers Address Default setting Description Remarks JP 1 1 2 For system use Not changeable JP5 1 2 Do not clear clear RTC and CMOS See JP5 settings RTC and CMOS clear below JP7 Short COMI power output setting See Settings for JP7 to 18 COM1 COM2 COM5 IPS pen COM6 power output below JP9 Open JP10 Short COM2 power output setting JP11 Open JP12 Open JP13 Short COM5 power output setting JP14 Open JP15 Open J
209. it on the IR 320 2 Turn on the power supply of the IR 320 and start up the Device Diagnostics Utility 3 Confirm that the dedicated printer unit is connected correctly and it can print out by using the Device Diagnostics Utility 4 The dedicated printer unit can be used zg Note Refer to Printing out by Windows for printing from the Windows application to the dedicated printer unit Setup procedure Use the following procedure to connect the printer unit 1 Turn on DIP switch 2 7 of the printer unit 2 When connecting a customer display set the baud rate to be the same for the dedicated printer as the customer display by setting their DIP switches Q Note The customer display and the baud rate of the dedicated printer unit are set to the same speed at the factory shipment 3 Connect one end of the cable to the connector on the rear of the printer unit 2 56 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 Bend the cable as shown below Rev C Setup 2 57 Confidential 7 When a printer unit or printer tray is already installed remove them When removing the printer unit disconnect the printer cable for the IR 320 9 Slide the printer unit in the direction indicated by the arrows so that the hooked area on the printer unit fits into the groove on the IR 320 Make sure the cable is not hooked by the projection on the plate 2 58 Setup Rev C
210. js SaaS 40 90 80 80 80 ae ES 00 EE LLL Use tT lt gt select key Enter Edit ESC Quit 4 64 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The highlighted key on the screen is the key being edited and the current definition of the key is displayed in the bottom part of the screen in the Old row Press the arrow keys to select the key to be edited then press Enter to switch to the next screen MO to M6 indicate the key lock keys Enter the definition for the selected key Your definition is displayed in the New row Epson POS Keyboard Utility 2 11 ee a EE fed EE E EE E EE ES EE E Eiz E EEE fie fe es Be eee eee eee eeeeeeeee2 Neu Jeeeeeel f TL LLL Press Key to edit Shift Shift Quit Ctrl Shift Exit Alt Ctrl Back Use the definition keys below to edit the key definitions Alt Ctrl Delete the previous key definition Shift Shift Delete input data and revert to the definition before the key was selected Ctrl Shift Save the input data The keytop changes to show that the key has been defined Press ESC to quit the Edit menu Download Command When you select DownLoad the following screen is displayed Epson POS Keyboard Utility YZ 11 Process keyboard map download Press Enter to switch to the screen below Rev C Utilities 4 65 l Ez EN Ls Ls Js Je ls Lele e La Js Le Ls a la e Lx fa o a o Jo Ls
211. keyboard configuration utility is exited Rev C Utilities 4 47 Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 Function When this utility is started the firmware setting is converted into the setting described in the file and this utility is terminated Startup The Automatic Definition Data Setting utility PKLOAD32 EXE has been copied in the directory specified in the installation procedure If the directory was not specified this utility has been copied in the c Program Files Key Config directory This utility can be started by the following method T Enter as follows from the MS DOS prompt Path PKLOAD32 filename n File name This is the pas name of the setting file for specifying the 28 key keyboard key lock setting file for Windows or the setting file for this utility k28 kyl file n When the n option is specified the following dialog box is displayed at the time of termination Ye i Completed to write cofiguration While the setting is being transferred the dialog box indicating the situation is displayed While the 28 key keyboard key lock setting file is being transferred the following is displayed Writing Configuration dd d where dd is the key number and d is the number of retry times up to six While the setting file for this utility see page 4 49 is being transferred the following is displayed Writing Configuration
212. l Handshaking Appendix C 1 Confidential If an application program is written in Visual C or some other language that uses the WIN API directly you can set the flow control settings in either of the following ways When JP32 on the POS board is SHORTED TM Printer control Either DTR DSR or XON XOFF CustomerDisplay control RIS CTS Note CustomerDisplay control cannot be guaranteed with XON XOFF When JP32 on the POS board is OPEN TM Printer control Either XON XOFF or RTS CTS CustomerDisplay control DTR DSR Y Notes CustomerDisplay control cannot be guaranteed with XON XOFF Windows Settings The recommended setting for the Windows FIFO buffer is disabled This prevents timing delays caused by the data being held in the buffer If customers want the setting to be enabled the manufacturer recommends that the transmission buffer size be less than 16 bytes Device Settings When Software Requires XON XOFF Handshaking with Jumper JP32 Open To set XON XOFF handshaking check that the IR 320 and TM Printer use the following settings lL Handshaking for the TM xxR Printer should be set to XON XOFF Set DIP switch 1 3 of the TM xxR Printer to ON The default setting is OFF a L Set Jumper JP32 on the POS board to OPEN The default setting is SHORTED a The recommended setting for the Windows FIFO buffer is disabled This prevents timing delays caused by the data being held in the buffer If customers want the settin
213. l is received by the chipset backup is always active as long as AC power is supplied Software Settings BIOS Settings The following settings must be made in BIOS setup to enable Wake On LAN Wake Up by PCI in Power Management Setup Disable Wake On LAN disabled Enable Wake On LAN enabled When this is set to Enable a wake up by Wake On LAN is possible This is specifies whether or not the chipset shown in the figure above recognizes the Wake On LAN signal Precautions 1 When a system using Wake On LAN is shut down by the OS or shut off normally by the soft power switch the function is enabled If the soft power switch is pressed and held down for 4 seconds or if the OS does not finish normally the function is disabled At power off BIOS sets the chipset for this item to off which means the function is always disabled when power is turned back on If the front switch is depressed for 4 seconds the machine powers off without going through BIOS and the function will be disabled regardless of the BIOS setting 2 If the OL RO3 battery unit is not installed Wake On LAN is not enabled immediately after AC power is turned on even though the BIOS has been set On the other hand if the OI R03 battery unit is installed immediately after AC power is turned on chipset settings are initialized and therefore do not reflect BIOS settings As a result Wake On LAN always must be set to on by hardware regardless of the BIOS setting be
214. le data file definition data file L28 Layer 28Key definition data EPSON Layer Keyboard Auto Definition Utility Vx xx xx 28 key definition data Now transfer 28Key Definition data transfer Error Message Content Firmware version is not correct The firmware version is incorrect Invalid parameter An invalid parameter was specified Firmware communication error Firmware communications failed File access error No such file or directory File access failed Rev C Utilities 4 41 End Codes End Code Content 0 Normal end 10 The firmware version is incorrect Or it was executed at another PC abnormal end 11 Parameter error abnormal ena 14 An error occurred in communications with the firmware abnormal ena 20 An error occurred during file access abnormal end 21 There was an error in the file s data format abnormal end Layer Change Reading Library Function This library offers functions that is necessary when using the layer function Functions int Select28KeyLayer int layer Function Switches the layer that is currently in use Argument Specifies the number of the layer from 0 to 3 to use or default layer 0x0f Return Values 0 Normal End 20 Communications error 21 Opening error 22 Argument error int GetCurrent28KeyLayer void Function Acquires the layer that is currently in use Argument None Ret
215. left button normal operation This operation sends touch panel coordinate data as mouse left button data 4 d Right Fix Mode 1Tap Mode When in the 1 Tap Mode When in the Right Fix Mode Touch Panel Driver for MS DOS When the LCD panel is changed or the MEDSTD COM is installed calibrate the Touch Panel by using the calibration Q Note MEDSTD COM must load before the calibration Follow the procedures below to calibrate 1 Type the following caldstd I10 P2E8 B96 S The meaning of these parameters are as follows Ixx IRQ number Default 10 PXxxx Port address Default 2E8 Bxx Baudrate Default 9600 S Graphic mode You need parameter S Text mode You don t need parameter S The calibration screen is displayed and nine mark is displayed Press the mark in the top left corner of the screen on Touch the nine marks on the screen a e g N When you finish calibration press SPACE bar to save the calibrated data Then press any key to go to drawing test 6 Ifyou need to stop the calibration press the ESC key to ignore the calibrated data Then press any key to go to drawing test 3 64 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual HDD Power Down Timer Setting When the time the HDD is not accessed exceeds the specified time the HDD motor can be stopped The method of setting depends on the OS LY Windows XP Professional This is set with the O
216. left side cover by sliding it downward 2 40 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 2 Remove the two screws from the printer unit or the printer tray 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable from the connector printer cable 4 Set the battery unit in the battery unit box Pull the tab of the battery box up and insert the battery unit into the battery box Rev C Setup 2 41 Confidential 5 Connect the cable of the battery unit as shown below 6 Reattach the printer unit or the printer tray using two screws 7 Reattach the side cover Setting the BIOS After the battery unit is installed change the BIOS setting by using the following procedure 1 When an external keyboard is not connected to the IR 320 connect the external keyboard to the mouse keyboard connector 2 Turn on the power supply to the IR 320 3 While the following message is on the display press Del Press DEL to enter SETUP 4 The BIOS setup utility starts up 5 Select Power Management Setup using the cursor keys and press Enter The Power Management Setup menu appears 6 Select System Battery and change the setting to Equipped 7 After completion of the setting press Esc The main menu resumes 8 SelectSave Exit Setup using the cursor keys and press Enter A dialog appears Press Y and th
217. licked the key is redrawn in the selected color and the Color dialog box is closed When Cancel is clicked the selected color is cancelled Key Program To assign a setting to an actual key run the program by either of the following methods 3 Click Prog One while a button is selected Only the selected key is programmed LI Click Prog All All the keys are programmed If the program ends correctly the following dialog box is displayed Rev C Utilities 4 21 Saving the Settings You can save the current settings as a file with the following steps 1 If you click Save the Save As dialog box is displayed Save in a Key Config E c ESE File name key02k24 Save as type 28 Keyboard Config file k28 y Cancel T Open as read only 2 If you input a file name and click Save the settings are saved in a file Use the file extension k28 Loading the Settings Load the settings as follows 1 If you click Load the Open dialog box is displayed Look in 3 Key Contig El ex BE File name key02 Files of type 28 Keyboard Config file k28 Cancel T Open as read only 2 Ifyou select a file name and click Open the selected setting is loaded New To clear the current settings and create new settings click New All the key settings are cleared 4 22 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Displaying the Key Top When View is clicked the Key View window opens so
218. llel port Table 5 7 Integrated Peripherals menu Items On chip Primay Secondary PCI Description This setting is to enable disable the IDE controller housed in the chip set ICH2 All of the default settings are set as Enabled Always use the default Enabled setting IDE If the Disabled settings are used the IRQ resources are released and become available for other devices If the IRQ resources that are released IRQ 14 is released for the primary and IRQ 15 for the secondary IDE Primary This setting sets the transfer mode for the IDE device connected to each interface All of the Secondary default settings are Auto The PIO is normally set as Auto but due to the auto detection Master Slave performed during POST the optimum method used by the connection device is then set as PIO BIOS If devices in different modes are connected to the master and the slave the transfer mode will be fixed at a slow speed therefore it is necessary to pay particular attention to the connection to each port If a setting is made that exceeds the maximum mode supported by the devic connected note that data errors may occur If On Chip Primary Secondary PCI IDE is set to Disabled the corresponding items cannot be selected IDE Primary This setting sets the DMA transfer mode for the IDE device connected to each interface All Secondary default settings are set as Auto The UDMA is normally set as Auto but due to the
219. me OI R01 001 Q TM printer Printer tray setting type Model name TM U200 series Model name TM H6000 series Model name TM T88ll series 0 External mounting type Model name TM U675 series Model name TM T285 series Model name TM H5000 series Operation Testing Products for IR The Operation Confirmed items are marketed by EPSON and are built in included or connected to an EPSON POS product and operation by has been confirmed by EPSON EPSON can also offer reference information for the selection of peripheral devices to the customer who constructs a system using EPSON POS products Please inquire what kind of device can be used from EPSON or the selling agent This operation confirmation evaluates the equipment in test environments and conditions but it does not guarantee the operation Therefore procurement and evaluation by the customer are required 1 8 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Software Configurations BIOS Setup and Self Diagnosis Functions BIOS setup defines the system configuration When the product is set up for the first time run this program to set the system environment To change the operating environment run this program again See Chapter 5 BIOS Functions Operating Systems The IR 320 runs on the standard Microsoft operating systems MS DOS Windows 98 Second Edition Windows NT WorkStation 4 0 Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional Win
220. me set the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops Q Note This function can be used only with BIOS version 2 13 00 or higher If your BIOS version is before 2 12 upgrade the BIOS and then do the above procedure When access to HDD occurs the motor of HDD begins to start and the HDD becomes accessible Windows 98 2000 XP Windows 98 and later operating systems have a hard disk drive power down function Therefore this function can be used to control hard disk drive power down in these operating systems 5 16 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual PNP PCI Configurations Menu In this menu set the IRQ and DMA assignment methods and other items Do not change the default settings under normal conditions Table 5 6 PNP PCI Configurations menu Items PNP OS Installed Description Use this setting to select whether the operating system is compatible with Plug and Play PnP The default setting is Yes Always use the default setting Contorlled By Reset Use this setting to reset the PnP information recorded in the Extended System Configuration Configuration Data ESCD block when restarting the system Data The default setting is Disabled Always use the default setting Resources Use this setting to select whether the allocation of the I O address IRQ DMA and other system resources is to be done by PnP BIOS or by the user The default setting is
221. mn Es CMSR Start End Sentinels Card Start Card End ISO JIS1 Track 1 Start ISO JIS1 Track 1 End ISO JIS1 Track 2 Start ISONIS1 Track 2 End a ISO Track 3 Start ISO Track 3 End T TIS2 Start JISZ End FE Information Cancel 4 10 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The following paragraphs define each item on the screen 1 Ignore MSR Keyboard Command If this check box is checked all commands to the keyboard firm are not accepted Typically this check box is checked for use with the external programmable keyboard It has not been checked in the initial setting Q Note Be careful that if this check box is checked this utility cannot be started unless the main body is turned off or reset To uncheck this check box reboot the main body or alternatively start this utility with the external keyboard disconnected 0 Use MSR Beep This is used to sound the beep at the time of reading D MSR Track Recognition ISO JIS1 Track 1 ISO JIS1 Track 2 ISO Track 3 Check the check box of the track to be read More than one track may be specified accordingly Track 1 2 and Track 3 have been selected in the initial setting m MSR Code Type English Japanese French German Spanish Selection is made according to the language setting of Windows 1 MSR Start End Sentinels Card Start Card End ISO JIS1 Track 1 Start JIS2 Start JIS2 End The characters to be prefixed and affixed to th
222. mp Exit Setup and press the Enter key The following dialog box appears SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N OS and Drivers 3 13 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press Y and Enter The system will restart and after a short time the License Agreement will appear Strike a key when ready When you press any key part of the License Agreement will appear Repeat the same procedure until you get to the end of the License Agreement The following message will appear Recovery Start from CD ROM Please type X enter start enter A gt _ Enter the following from the command prompt A gt x Enter X gt start Enter The following message will appear Select and enter the partition size of the HDD Please select the system partition size 1 10GB Default size F Full size of HD Please push a key of 1 or F _ Select the range to format as the system area on the hard disk Press the 1 key to select 10GB or press the F key to select the full size After that the OS recovery starts The image data exchange dialog will appear Insert the Windows 2000 CD ROM 2 in the CD ROM drive then press the OK button When the prompt below is displayed on the screen OS recovery work is complete X RESTORE gt _ Eject the Windows 2000 CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Reboot and start the BIOS setup utility Return the First Boot Device in the Advanced BIOS Features
223. ms related to touch panel operation It consists of the following four functions 1 Calibration Function Operation Setting Function m D Version Display Function m Double Click Permissible Range Setting Function Q Note Only a user with administrator authority can use the calibration function and operation setting function Each item is displayed in gray and cannot be set if an ordinary user uses the tool Starting the Touch Panel Configuration Tool Start the touch panel environment setting tool by the following procedure 1 Start Windows 2 Select Programs EPSON Touch Panel Tool Touch Panel Configuration Tool in that order from the Start menu 3 The Epson Touch Panel Configuration Tool starts Calibration Function The following screen is displayed if the Calibration tab is clicked mM EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool xl Calibration Environment Settings Version OK Cancel Apply Help Q Note Only a user with administrator authority can use the calibration function Each item is displayed in gray and cannot be set if an ordinary user uses the tool Calibration starts when Calibration Start is clicked See the previous item Touch Panel Calibration for details of the calibration procedure Rev C OS and Drivers 3 59 Operation Setting Function The following screen is displayed when the Environment Settings tab is clicked ih EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool x C
224. nction Key Yes Yes Yes Yes 13457890 Yes Yes No Yes 26 Yes Yes Yes Yes a z Yes Yes Yes Yes Tab Yes Yes Yes Yes BS Yes No Yes Yes Space Yes No No No Enter Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes e Yes Yes No Yes Ins Yes No Yes Yes Del Yes No Yes Yes 4 60 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Definable keys continued Home Yes No Yes Yes End Yes No Yes Yes PageUp Yes No Yes Yes PageDown Yes No Yes Yes T Yes No Yes Yes J Yes No Yes Yes gt Yes No Yes Yes lt Yes No Yes Yes Ten key Yes No Yes Yes Ten key Yes No Yes Yes Enter Ten key Yes No Yes Yes 0 1234567 89 len key Yes No Yes No 84 key Configuration Utility for MS DOS You can use the key configuration utility for MS DOS to define keys of the KeyLock keys and 84 key keyboard connected to the IR 310 320 in MS DOS The version of the utilities is renewed The compatibility ofthe 84 Key Configuration Utility for MS DOS and the keyboard firmware Keyboard firmware 3 00 3 03 POSKB exe Ver 2 11 OK OK POSKB exe Ver 2 00 OK NG Key definitions Number of definitions 84 keys and position key lock keys 16 or 21 characters maximum per key Shift Ctrl Alt Gray are each handled as one character Operation Keyboard mouse not available Functions File 1 Designating a key definition file Load 2 Reading
225. nd COM5 and COM6 can be used 6 The system starts up and COM5 and COM6 can be used Operating Confirmation Of The Hardware Device Diagnostics Utility Whe using the Device Diagnostics Utility the communication lines between the devices connected with the IR 320 can be tested The Device Diagnostics Utility can test the following The connecting condition of each device The printing test of the TM printer The display test of the customer display The operating test of the cash drawer The loopback test of the serial port The loopback test ot the LPT1 port The printing test of the printer connected to the LPT1 Refer to the Device Diagnostics Utility in Chapter6 Device Diagnostics Utility for details Rev C Setup 2 71 Confidential Printing Using Windows It is possible to print to the dedicated printer unit of the IR 320 using Windows Q Note Before executing a test printout from Windows set up the dedicated printer unit correctly and confirm the operation using the Device Diagnostics Utility If it does not set up correctly the test printout from Windows is not executed normally Refer to Installing a Dedicated Printer Unit for the setup procedure and the operating confirmation procedure of the Device Diagnostics Utility Operating progress Set up the dedicated printer unit to the IR 320 confirm the operation by using the Device Diagnostics Utility Refer to Installing a Dedicated Printer Unit
226. nd click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the touch panel driver Uninstall the Touch Panel Driver using the following procedure 1 2 4 5 Open the Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON Touch Panel Driver is selected Click Change Remove The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click Yes The reboot dialog box is displayed Click OK Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed Click OK Installing the Serial Port Driver When the serial port is transmitting with Windows XP this Driver prevents the OS from shifting to the Standby mode and the operation of the full on mode is continued Rev C OS and Drivers 3 29 Q Note Be sure an administrator installs the serial driver Install the serial port driver using the following procedure 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start WinXP Epserial EPSERIAL EXE 2 Start serial driver Setup The welcome screen is displayed Click Next 3 After installation is completed the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed Select Yes I want to restart my computer now then click Finish to restart the system Uninstalling the serial port driver Uninstall the serial port driver using the following procedure
227. nded Auto BIOS determines the optimum method based on the information obtained by the device The LBA method is normally used Capacity This item indicates the memory capacity for the connection device The following differences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value calculated according to information obtained by the device is displayed Manual The value calculated according to information specified by the user is displayed Cylinder This item indicates the number of cylinders for the connection device Th following differences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 65 535 only when the access method is set as CHS Head This item indicates the number of heads for the connection device The following differences occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the device is displayed Manual The user can set the value within a range of 0 255 only when the access method is set as CHS 5 5 BIOS Functions Table 5 2 Standard CMOS Features menu continued Items Description Precomp This item indicates the number of write compensation cylinders for the connection device The following differences will occur depending on the device detection method used Auto The value obtained by the dev
228. nection Wizard dialog box is displayed Input the name to be given to the current settings then click Finish Network Connection Wizard Completing the Network Connection Wizard The connection will be named To create this connection and save it in the Network and Dial up Connections folder click Finish To edit this connection in the Network and Dial up Connections folder select it click File and then click Properties 11 The newly set connection is added to the Network and Dial up Connection dialog box To change the connection method right click on the newly added icon and select Properties The settings can then be changed Rev C OS and Drivers 3 9 EPSON Serial Driver When the serial port is transmitting with Windows 2000 this Driver prevents the OS from shifting to the Standby mode and the operation of the full on mode can be continued When installing the service pack install the serial driver again Install Q Note Be sure an administrator installs the serial driver Install the serial driver using the following procedure 1 Execute C backup epserial Epserial exe 2 Start serial driver Setup The welcome screen is displayed Click Next 3 After installation is completed the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed Select Yes I want to restart my computer now then click Finish to restart the system Uninstall Uninstall the serial driver using the followin
229. nstall it Set the HDD to the DMA mode by using Service pack 6a VIDEO Driver Installation Sound Driver Installation Touch Panel Driver Installation Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Setup procedure Windows NT is set up by using the following procedure 1 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IR 320 Insert the CD ROM of Windows NT in the CD ROM drive and boot up the system The Welcome to Setup screen dialog box is displayed Press the Enter key According to the instructions on the screen input the necessary items and continue installing The Windows NT Licensing Agreement dialog box is displayed Press the PageDown key and confirm contents to the last page Press the F8 I agree key 3 40 OS and Drivers Rev C 10 11 12 13 IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual According to the instructions on the screen input the necessary items and continue installing When copying of the file is completed according to the instructions on the screen take the Windows NT CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive and then boot the system from the HDD The Windows NT Setup Wizard starts According to the instructions on the screen insert the CD ROM of Windows NT into the CD ROM drive again and click OK According to the instructions on
230. nual Do not change the settings of any items for which Do not change is specified in this manual If an incorrect setting is made the IR 320 may not operate 5 2 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Troubleshooting After the BIOS Setup utility has been used the computer may be not able to be started up normally because of changes made When the BIOS Setup utility can be started up execute the Load Optimized Default from the BIOS setup utility save amp exit and then restart the system When the BIOS Setup utility cannot be started up clear the CMOS with the jamper Clear the CMOS by shorting 2 3 of JP5 For details see Chapter 1 Jumper Locations and Settings Changing settings To choose an item first move the cursor onto a desired field with the arrow keys Next select a value in the field with PageUp or PageDown Finally select the Save amp Exit Setup command in the main menu which saves the currently displayed values of all the menus Rev C 5 3 BIOS Functions BIOS Setup Main Menu The BIOS setup main menu contains the following items Table 5 1 BIOS setup main menu Item Standard CMOS Features Contents Basic BIOS setup menu See Table 5 2 Advanced BIOS Features Extended BIOS setup menu See Table 5 3 Advanced Chipset Features These features set items related to chipset Since these settings are executed via the Load Optimized Defaults they ar
231. o the C POSKB directory Start this program as follows 1 Exit Windows and restart the system in DOS mode 2 At the DOS prompt type POSKB28 and press Enter 4 58 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 3 When this program starts the following screen appears Input the file name for load save or edit How to Operate Initial Screen Select the button with the arrow buttons and gt and J and press Enter to execute the command File This key is used to specify the key definition file name Enter the file name and press Enter To cancel press Esc Load This key is used to read the data from the key definition file specified by the File button Save This key is used to save the data under the key definition file name specified by the File button Edit This key is used to edit the key definition by using the following procedure 1 The 28 keys are displayed on the screen in the same array as the keyboard unit Select the key to be edited with the gt T and y keys and press Enter to start the editing 2 Press the keys one by one according to the contents of the key to be defined The key definition contents are displayed in order of inputting in the New column in the lower part of the screen The previous key definition contents are displayed in the Old column 3 When Alt Ctrl is pressed the process retraces the inputted key contents by one key contents When Ctrl Shift is
232. o the IR 310 but there are several differences they are listed in this appendix For more details ask your dealer Hardware Here is a comparison of the hardware Item IR 310 IR 320 CPU CPU Celeron PPGA FCPGA 366Hz Celeron M FCPGA2 1 2 GHz to 733 MHz Celeron M FCPGA 733 MHz Pentium Ill FCPGA 700MHz Socket 370pin Socket lt Secondary cache Pentium I M FCPGA 256KB Celeron FCPGA2 Memory Celeron FCPGA 128KB 1 2GHz 256KB Celeron M FCPGA 128KB Memory Main Memory 168pin DIMM slot x2 lt 3 3V SDRAM 256MB max PC66 512MB max PC 100 System ROM 256KB 512KB Chipset Intel440BX Intel 810E2 VideoController CHIPS 69000 Included in the Chipset Video Memory 2MB Part of the main memory is used Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX standard 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX installation Wake On LAN and PXE RPL Wake Up on LAN available available Installed on the POS board Installed on the main board Sound Option Standard Interface No External line inout output mike input Speaker A built in mono speaker with a hardware volume A music CD cannot be played with the speaker Supplement FDD 3 5 inch 1 unit 1 44MB 720KB ie HDD 3 5 inch 1 unit or 2 5 inch Svice 2 unit installed IDE interface 5 GB 20 GB 20 GB or more For IDE UltraDMA 33 For IDE UltraDMA 33 66 100 CD ROM drive Installation possible as an option CD R RW
233. of the variable are divided with for specification These two can be specified by the byte width in the form of decimal or hexadecimal or character For the decimal specification it is described as it is For the hexadecimal specification amp should be prefixed For the character should be prefixed SystemParamxx may be described in more than one file by describing decimal in xx from 00 in order up to 99 Rev C Utilities 4 49 In the MSR section an entry that is related to the MSR is described Beep may be specified to be On or Off When it is specified to be On beep sounds while the MSR is being read When it is specified to be Off beep does not sound while the MSR is being read CodeType is specified to be US JP FR GR or SP The key in data created while the MSR was being read becomes conformable to the keyboard array of the specified country ValidTracks is specified to be 1 2 3 or J When it is specified to be 1 track 1 can be read When it is specified to be 2 track 2 can be read When it is specified to be 3 track 3 can be read When it is specified to be J the JIS2 track can be read More than one file may be specified by dividing them with CodeDefinitionxx is described to make the character created while the MSR was being read original The specification is made in order of character code key number and concurrent pressing key information by dividing them with If not required the concurrent pressing key
234. og box appears Click OK Finished x Done changing DMA detection settings 5 The system reboots Installing the Video Driver Y Note Before installing the display driver be sure to install Service Pack 6a This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Set the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 to the CD ROM drive Start Winnt Video Winnt4E67 EXE 2 The Release note is displayed Click Next 3 The Setup Wizard starts The Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 4 The License Agreement dialog box is displayed Click Yes Rev C OS and Drivers 3 43 5 Installing is completed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that the Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the video driver Uninstalling cannot be done Installing the Sound Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Winnt Sound SETUP EXE 2 The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The About SoundMAX Integrated Digital Audio dialog box is displayed Click OK 4 The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the sound driver 1 Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel 2 Select
235. omponents 2 0 Service Pack 1 Intel Video driver Intel Network driver Analog Devices Sound driver EPSON Touch Panel driver EPSON Logon tool 1 EPSON DM MS Series setup utility 1 E GO O Eh OO es 2 2 EPSON CD ROM driver for DOS 2 Rev C OS and Drivers 3 15 Q Note 1 These are not installed during the auto installation procedure 2 When using the OS Recovery Version of the Pre installation HDD To confirm the version of the HDD see the file HDVER TAG in the root directory of the boot drive This file is text formatted and can be read using Notepad or a similar text editor The file HDVER TAG has the following contents HD Information MODEL IM 320 OS WindowsNT40 LANG Dutch English French German Italian Portuguese Spanish VER 1 Directory Configuration The root directory of the HDD is structured as follows Backup Keycfg Backup of MSR Utility Win Disk1 Backup of MSR Utility for Windows DOS Backup of MSR Utility for MS DOS Logon Logon tool backup folder Network Network driver backup folder Sound Sound driver backup folder Touch Touch Panel driver backup folder Video Video driver backup folder Ie6sp1 Internet Explorer 6 0 backup folder Mdac MDAC 2 0 Wntsp6 Service Pack 6 backup folder Recovery Recovery folder Bootfd Data Drvlib Driver groups 1386 Setup file folder Temp Program Files W
236. on sets the permissible range for Windows to recognize a double click The permissible range in the Windows default setting value is narrow and if the second tap position is too far from the first tap position when a double click is attempted on the touch panel a double click will not be recognized This function can make it easier for the computer to recognize a double click by setting the permissible double click recognition range so that it is wider Y Note When Windows 2000 is set up and a new user is entered set the double click latitude for each user As for the details refer to the Setting the recognition range of the double click section Start the Double Click Latitude Setting by the following procedure Method Execute Programs EPSON Touch Panel Tool Touch Panel Configuration Tool from the start menu Click OK There is no need to set other operations Touch Panel Right Button Emulator The touch panel right button emulator is a tool that switches the tap operation between the right button and left button in order to perform a mouse right button operation on the touch panel The touch panel right button emulator is displayed in the front plane window at all times and switching between the right button and left button operation can be done any time 3 62 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Starting the Touch Panel Right Button Emulator Start the touch panel right button emulator
237. ons 5 28 BIOS Functions Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default Soft Off by PWR BTTN nstant Off nstant Off nstant Off Delay 4 Sec Disabled Wake Up by PCI card Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Power On by Ring Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Resume by Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Date of Month Alarm wr ee eee Time hh mm ss Alarm were ie nee Primary IDE O Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Primary IDE 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Secondary IDE 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Secondary IDE 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled FDD COM LPT Port Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled PCIPIRQ A D Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual PnP PCI Configurations The setup items related to PCI configurations Plug and Play are as follows Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default PNP OS Installed No Yes Yes Yes Reset Configuration Data Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Resource Controlled By Auto ESCD Auto ESCD Auto ESCD Manual RQ 3 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 4 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 5 assigned to PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP PCI ISA PnP Legacy ISA RQ 7 assi
238. or and save it The following example is for copying to the C DOS directory In case of copying to other directory describe the directory name with its full path DEVICE C DOS CDATAPI SYS D CDROM Add the following description to the AUTOEXEC BAT of the MS DOS with a text editor and save it The following example has MSCDEX EXE in the C DOS directory If you have it in another directory describe the directory with its full path In case of the L option specify a drive name The following is an example specifying the D drive In case of specifying the other drive name describe the optional drive name C DOS MSCDEX EXE D CDROM L D Restart MS DOS Installing the Network Driver The Network Driver is provided in the form compressed in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 MS DOS cannot extract the compressed file Therefore by using another PC to read the CD ROM install the Network driver to the IR 320 after extracting the Network driver in the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Y Note Windows 98 NT or 2000 is necessary for extracting the compressed file Extracting the network driver Extract the compressed file of the Network Driver by the following procedure 1 2 Rev C Start the other PC to read the CD ROM and start either Windows 98 NT or 2000 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Dos62 Network PRODOS EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed
239. or Password Supervisor Password When only displaying BIOS Setup User Password User Password OS Select For DRAM gt 64MB This setting is used to specify whether the OS 2 has more than 64MB of memory or not The default setting is Non OS2 Non OS82 This setting is used when an OS other than an OS2 is used This is the normal setting O82 This setting is used when the OS is an O82 By using this setting the method for communicating the mounted memory capacity changes to a method specified by the OS2 5 8 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Table 5 3 Advanced BIOS Features menu continued Items HDD S M A R T capability Description This setting is used to specify whether the S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology function is being used or not If the connection device is not compatible with ATA 3 Ultra ATA standards or above this means that the device does not support the S M A R T function making this setting invalid The default setting is Enabled Enabled Enablea is used to set the S M A R T function Please note that in order to use this setting a command device is necessary to initiate this function during startup and a separate software package is needed to activate the S M A R T function This is the normal setting Disabled This setting is used to disable the S M A R T function Report No FDD This setting is used to communicate
240. ow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled CCO00 CFFFF Shadow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled DO000 D3FFF Shadow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled D4000 D7FFF Shadow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled D8000 DBFFF Shadow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled DCO000 DFFFF Shadow Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled When Typematic Rate Setting isa Disabled Typematic Rate Msec cannot be selected 5 22 BIOS Functions Chars Sec ANd Typematic Delay Rev C Advanced Chipset Features The setup items related to the chipset are as follows IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default SDRAM CAS Latency Time 3 3 3 2 Do not change Do not change System BIOS Cacheable Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Video BIOS Cacheable Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled CPU Latency Timer Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Delayed Transaction Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled CAS Latency 3 3 3 2 Paging Mode Control Close Open Open Open RAS to CAS Override by CAS LT by CAS LT by CAS LT Override 2 RAS Timing Slow Fast Fast Fast RAS Precharge Timing Slow Fast Fast Fast Integrated Peripherals The setup items related to onboard peripherals are as follows Item Options Fail Safe Default Optimized Default
241. ower switch is turned off or the power cable is unplugged when the unit is in full on mode power starts flowing from the battery unit If power starts flowing from the battery unit turn ON the main power switch which stops the power supply from the battery unit 2 2 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Static electricity can damage the components of the IR 320 Before you touch any components touch a grounded metal surface to discharge the static electricity in your body It is also recommended that you wear a grounded wristband and work on an antistatic surface Do not touch the connectors Dirt may cause a malfunction Do not apply excessive force to connectors cables or screws during connection Excessive force may damage the connectors or the screw threads Do not allow cables to be pinched The cables may be damaged or disconnected Operations Before Setting Up the IR 320 Before setting up the IR 320 complete the following operations 1 If Windows is running exit it The resulting power off condition is called soft off Proceed to step 4 Press the soft front power switch once and let go The resulting power off condition is also called soft off Proceed to step 4 If the power does not go off proceed to step 4 Press the soft power switch again and hold it down for 4 seconds or more The power supply to the IR 320 will go off Turn off the main side power s
242. pe LCD unit can actually display for expression is 256 IDE Devices It is possible to mount up to two 2 5 in HDDs as primary IDE devices and a CD ROM drive CD R RW drive and a CompactFlash disk as secondary IDE devices Y Note HDD Life 5 years or when the total amount of use exceeds 20 000 hours Condition The HDD s motor stops for 10 minutes or more every 24 hours for 2 5 HDD Rev C Hardware Specifications 7 5 Serial Device The IR 320 has four serial ports COM1 COM2 COM5 COM6 Also 5V or 12V can be output at the 1st pin by the Jumper setting of the main board The serial ports COM3 and COM4 are internally used for the dedicated TM printer unit customer display COM3 and the touch panel COMA4 Also the system can be started up by the ring signal from the 9st pin To use the serial ports COM5 and COM6 it is necessary to set other unused devices for example parallel to disabled not used using the BIOS setup and then allocate interrupts for the serial ports COM5 and COM6 PCI Slots The PCI of the IR 320 has the following features LI 3 3 V power supply 1 Mountable PCI card size The PCI cards within the dimensional range as shown in the following figure can be mounted 135 mm 5 3 or less 101 mm 4 0 Parts Side or less Three terminal regulators for the drawer As with the IR 320 the drawer can be used via the dedicated TM printer unit only when the dedicated TM printer
243. per and Switch Settings Rev C 3 65 66 67 68 69 Add the HDD Power Down Settings 5 1 12 14 15 16 25 27 Add the BIOS Ver 2 11 02 1 18 19 20 21 Change the Dimensions 5 12 25 Add the Onboard Lan Boot ROM Rev C iii Key to Symbols The symbols in this manual are identified by their level of importance as defined below Read the following carefully before handling the product N WARNING Provides information that must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury ZN CAUTION Provides information that must be observed to prevent damage to the equipment or loss of data O Possibility of causing bodily injuries A Possibility of causing physical damage 1 Possibility of causing information loss Y Note Provides important information and useful tips on the operation of the equipment and the necessary limitation matters to maintain the performance of the product Precautions iv WARNING Turn off the main power switch immediately and unplug the power cable if the IR 320 produces smoke a strange odor or unusual noise Continued use may lead to fire or electric shock Contact your dealer or an EPSON service center for advice L1 Never disassemble or modify this product Tampering with this product may result in injury fire or electric shock D Never install this product and connect the cable while occurring thunder to avoid shock D Always use a specified power sup
244. ply Using the other power supply may lead to fire or shock 11 Never insert or disconnect the power plug with wet hands Doing so may result in severe shock LY Do not allow foreign objects to fall into this product These foreign objects may lead to fire or shock 11 If water or other liquid spills into this product turn off the power switch unplug the power cable immediately Continued usage may lead to fire or shock Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Do not place multiple leads on the power outlet Overloading the outlet may lead to fire Always supply power directly form a standard domestic power outlet Handle the power cable with care Improper handling may lead to fire or shock Do not modify or attempt to repair the cable Do not place any heavy object on the cable Avoid excessive bending twisting and pulling of the cable Do not place the cable near heating equipment Check that the plug is clean before plugging it in Be sure to push the prongs all the way in Make sure that the wall outlet can be accessed easily in order to unplug the power cable from it immediately in case of emergency Regularly remove the power plug from the outlet and clean the base of the prongs and between the prongs If you leave the power plug in the outlet for a long time dust may collect on the base of the prongs causing a short and fire ZN CAUTION m Rev C Do not connect devices other than tho
245. printer were replaced by a TM U375 printer the TM U950 SO would have to be replaced by a TM U375 SO but the rest of the software including the POS printer CO would remain the same In other words a switch from one printer to another requires only a change in the SO EPSON Software The software products OCX drivers that EPSON offers to enable such an OPOS system are called the EPSON OPOS ADK The EPSON OPOS ADK provides the OCX driver and much more EPSON also provides custom tools to support the construction and development of an OPOS application software development environment Keyboard Firmware Setting Utility for MS DOS The Keyboard Firmware Setting utility PKMODE2 EXE sets the POS board built in the IR 320 By using this utility the keyboard firmware and the MSR unit can be set Start The Keyboard Firmware Setting utility PK MODE2 EXE has been registered in the following directory in the initial setting c backup keycfg Dos Pkmode2 exe Prepare a floppy disk of MS DOS that can be booted and copy this utility onto this floppy disk To start the Keyboard Firmware Setting utility exit Windows and reboot the system from MS DOS By inputting the command name from the keyboard the utility starts Rev C Utilities 4 53 Q Note To execute this utility be sure to exit Windows and reboot the system from MS DOS beforehand This utility cannot be executed from the DOS box To use the MSR unit execute this utility
246. r 6 Device Diagnosis Utility Describes the Device Diagnosis Utility Chapter 7 Hardware Specifications Describes items such as system memory interruption switch and indicator Rev C vii Appendix A Wake On LAN Describes the BIOS setup the Power On Self Test and the device self diagnosis utility Appendix B IR 310 versus IR 320 Describes differences between the IR 310 and IR 320 Appendix C Serial Handshaking Describes the Serial Handshaking Related Manuals Related Manuals Name Comments IR 320 User s Manual Describes the basic setup and operation procedure IR 320 Service Manual Describes the maintenance and repair procedure for IR 320 service engineers viii Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Contents Revision Informatica Be WANG SOE RA ot PS td ew a Re dh Be iii Key to Symbols seses da e ENERE EA A Ba aa ek E oe iv Precautions A E id E Ea iv About Ths Mandale ta Maes apts ahs vii Ainvof the Manual toises 64 2 6 A a Baek AG lates dele a ares as ra de vii Contents of the Manual oiuom sincii Bes ele calla ete he es bie a i vii Related Manuals tebe sete a Saeed Geeks Ses eel a Eee dea kat viii Contents cia a AA A A Sa A A IA Sie ae A ER ix Chapter 1 IR 320 System Overview Aboutthe IR 20 uni e SAA ARA AA AA atte e sd Boe 1 1 Model Configuration s meta a Seas hak Sey ee ed ise a ee ee ee 1 1 Unpacking 32 22 ir a A a sia oe whee ele DR E a d
247. r is installed on this key top Install the key top cover using the following procedure Trim a piece of paper to the key size Write down the key function on the paper set it on the key top and install the key top cover on the key top The key function can then be conveniently identified at a glance 1 Create a label for the key by trimming paper to the key size and writing the key function on the label Set the label on the key top Rev C Setup 2 45 Confidential 2 Snap the key top cover on the key top with the round concave facing upward Firmly push it until the key top cover clicks Sia Removing the key top cover To remove the key top cover use the following procedure 1 Take off the key top using the key top remover 2 Turn the key top over and push the key top cover off using a pin or a sharp pointed tool lt Utility For the keying in using the 28 Key Keyboard unit the definition data of each key must be set using the utility and the setting contents must be written in the K B firmware Refer to Chapter 4 Utilities about the installation and the way of using each utility Setting and writing the definition data of the 28 Key Keyboard in the K B firmware QO The 28 key definition utility The Windows version and the MS DOS version Back up the definition data The definition data is written in the K B firmware but please back it up The backup file is made in the 28 Key Keyboard definition utility T
248. re If you install a Windows 98 Locally procured edition follow the steps below Windows 98 Installation Insert the MS DOS startup disk and CD ROM for Windows 98 and turn on the IR 320 to perform the setup Enter the product key of the COA package You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Chipset Driver Installation Install using the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD Set the HDD to the DMA mode with OS Network Driver Installation VIDEO Driver Installation Sound Driver Installation Touch Panel Driver Installation Install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 AC line tool Installation When using the Battery Unit OI R03 install the software from the Driver I CD ROM for the IR 320 Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 3 46 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Setup Procedure Windows 98 is set up by using the following procedure 1 2 10 11 Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IR 320 Insert the Startup disk of the MS DOS in the FDD Turn on the power supply to the system Insert the CD ROM of Windows 98 in the CD ROM drive and start SETUP EXE The Setup Wizard starts The License Agreement is displayed Read it through and confirm your agreement to the terms And then select I accept the agreement
249. re 2 options 1 and 3 Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration Power Management Setup Menu In this menu set the items related to power management Table 5 5 Power Management Setup menu Items Description Video Off Sets the method to turn the monitor off for the Video Off Mode Method The default setting is DPMS Change the setting to match the system configuration type of connected monitor The settings are explained below Bland Screen Use this setting when connecting an earlier version monitor that is compatible with power management terminals that only have a video off function V H SYNC Blank This stops output of the horizontal sync signal vertical sync signal and display signal from the video controller Use this setting for monitors in which power management is enabled when these signals end DPMS This activates BIOS control in accordance with the Display Power Management System DPMS function of the video controller The monitor must be equipped with the DPMS function Video Off In Use this setting to turn off the video when entering Suspend Mode Suspend The default setting is Yes Always use the default setting Yes Choose this to stop video output in Suspend Mode No With this setting video output continues even in Suspend Mode Suspend Type Set the Suspend method of 1 POS mode The default is PwrOn Suspend There are two options PwrOn Suspend
250. registry setting file headless reg using the following procedure to change the registry The registry setting file is in the C Backup Logon directory 1 Double click the headless reg The setting is applied 2 When the system is restarted the setting is valid 4 50 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Installation The instructions on the installation of this software are found in the Readme file in the C Backup Logon directory For installation use the following procedure 1 Execute C backup logon Setup exe The Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 2 Specify the destination of the installation directory C Program Files EPSON SEGina directory is the default When Next is clicked installation starts 3 When installation is complete the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Select Yes and click Finish to reboot the system ZN CAUTION After installation of the SEGina in Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 be sure to reboot the system If the Actinkey is executed without rebooting the system trouble may occur If trouble occurs reinstall the SEGina How to Use The following three modules are installed SEGina Controls logon with its main module Logonkey Software keyboard displayed at the time of logon Actinkey Software keyboard displayed after logon In Windows NT 4 0 when the power to the system is turned on the Logonkey is displayed together with the Logon dialog box
251. rojection 7 Attach the front CompactFlash card adapter with one screw 8 Connect the cable for the front CompactFlash card adapter to the connector 9 Reattach the HDD cover 10 Reattach the side panel with two screws Rev C Setup 2 23 Confidential 11 Reattach the side cover 12 Close the front panel Installing an LCD Unit Three LCD units are available LCD unit Type Display size Resolution DM LR104T TFT 10 4 26 42 cm SVGA 800x600 DM LR121SL TFT 12 1 30 73 cm SVGA 800x600 DM LR121SV TFT 12 1 30 73 cm SVGA 800x600 The 84 keyboard DM KR084 can be installed instead of an LCD unit DM LR121Series DM LR104T L1 Attach the ferrite core an accessory of the IR 320 to the appointed cable LI Select the touch panel driver from the type of the LCD unit and install when the OS is installed Q Note When you connect another type of the LCD unit you need to install another touch panel driver For details ask your dealer Description of jumper switch for each LCD unit LCD unit Jumper switch DM LR104T 052 2 3 DM LR104T 252 1 2 DM LR121SL 1 2 DM LR121SV 1 2 2 24 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual DM LR121Series 1 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward 3 Remove the printer unit or the printer tray When removing the printer unit remove the printer cable
252. rved Memory Size 64K is the only option setting that can be selected 5 30 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Setting a Password Select the password setting option Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password from the main menu and the following message is displayed in the center of the screen Type a password The password is case sensitive and made up of up to eight alphanumeric characters ENTER PASSWORD Typing a password clears any previously entered password After you press Enter the message below is displayed CONFIRM PASSWORD Retype the password you typed If you do not want to use any password simply press Enter at both prompts The password will be cleared and the password function will be disabled If you forget your password short pins 2 and 3 of jumper JP5 for IR 320 and turn on the power to clear the contents of the CMOS After clearing the CMOS be sure to perform the following LI Remove the jumper cap from pins 2 and 3 of jumper JP5 L Execute LOAD Optimized Defaults from the main menu of the BIOS setup utility L Reset BIOS necessary items To abort the process press Esc Rev C 5 31 BIOS Functions Power On Self Test POST The IR 320 inspects the system environment setting and the hardware by the Power On Self Test POST When an error is detected the error message is displayed and beeps are produced Error messages are listed in following clause Beep sound
253. s It has an AC outlet that can work together with the system 0 Security Data can be protected from being stolen by key locking of the front cover Six access levels can be set by using different types of manager keys Owners or managers can set different levels of access to the system The battery backup option can prevent data from being lost due to a power out 0 High performance Power and speed needed for processing data is offered Memory can be expanded to a maximum of 512 MB The BIOS supports APM 1 2 ACPI 1 0b Plug amp Play SMBIOS 2 2 DMI and Wake On LAN 1 2 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Part Names The figures below show the part names of the IR 320 DM LR121Series LCD Display Unit lock lever POWER LED HDD LED LCD brightness adjustment buttons Rev C IR 320 System Overview 1 3 DM LR104T LCD Display Unit paper FEED button customer display option keylock printer unit option HDD LED POWER LED LCD unit option main power switch front cover key lock MSR unit option lock switch front cover soft power switch main power switch keyboard mouse side cover connector rear cover 1 4 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual CD ROM CD R RW Drive Ol R06 reset switch volume Front CompactFlash Driv
254. s The beep sounds when detecting the following errors with the short beep 1 The memory errors are notified by repeating long beeps Check the DIMM installation 1 The video errors are notified by repeating one long beep and two short beeps The video controller of the main board may be faulty 1 When detecting an error except the memory and the viceo POST messages are displayed POST messages Error detection 5 32 The following is a list of POST messages An error message may be followed by a prompt to press F1 to continue or to press Del to enter setup Table 5 8 POST messages Message BIOS ROM checksum error System halted Description The checksum of the BIOS code in the BIOS chip is incorrect the possibility to mistake by the BIOS code is shown CMOS battery failed The COMS battery is no longer functional Replace the lithium battery of the main board CMOS checksum error Defaults loaded The Checksum of the CMOS is incorrect so the system loads the default equipment configuration A checksum error may indicate that the COMS is corrupt This error may be caused by a weak battery Check the lithium battery and replace it if necessary DISK BOOT FAILURE INSERT SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS ENTER When the disk that the system file is not installed in the FDD is inserted pull out it from the FDD and press Enter When the system file cannot be detected in First Boot Device Second
255. s property Turn off monitor Windows 98 Set by Power Management property Turn off monitor MS DOS No setting When Power Button Tool is installed Win 98 and Win 2K can realize No Operation In the video off mode the unit immediately returns to the full on mode when input is received from the keyboard mouse or touch panel 1 10 IR 320 System Overview Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Note that the reset operation differs depending on the BIOS setting for the switch when the soft power switch is pressed during the video off mode BIOS Soft Off by PWR BTTN setting Type of OS OS Setting Instant Off Delay 4 Sec Disabled Windows XP Shutdown Full on Full on Shutdown Standby Full on Full on Standby Never No Operation Windows 2000 Shutdown Full on Full on Shutdown Standby Full on Full on Standby Windows 98 Standby Full on Full on Standby MS DOS Forced power off Reset to the full on mode When Power Button Tool is installed Win 98 and Win 2K can realize No Operation For Windows 2000 even if the soft power switch is pressed accidentally in the video off mode it stays in the video off mode 5 Suspend Mode Turning off such items as the LCD backlight circuit and CPU when there is no input operation for a specified time period in the full on mode extends the life of these parts In Windows 98 click Start select S
256. s only the code for the selected key when this button is clicked while a key is selected Prog All Programs the settings of all the keys View Opens the Key View window and displays the key top 4 18 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Print Displays the Print dialog box Key Definitions Each key on the screen corresponds with the actual key top of the keyboard unit For defining the key top use the following procedure 1 Click the key you want to set to use this code and it becomes selected Clicking it again cancels the selection 2 Click Code and open the KeyCode dialog box 3 Input the code for the selected key from the keyboard This code can be up to a maximum of 63 bytes When you select a key if you hold down Shift and click the key immediately to the right of or immediately below the selected key the two keys are connected By repeating this procedure a number of keys can be connected to create one large key If you press Shift while the connected key is selected the connection is canceled 4 If you click OK the setting becomes valid and the key dialog box is closed If you click Cancel the setting is canceled If you click Reset the code is cleared Setting the Key Label Use the following steps to set the key label displayed on the key position button 1 Click the key you want to label and it becomes selected 2 If Label is clicked the KeyLabel dialog box is opened
257. s utility cannot start in order Do not reset this utility or turn off the power to the main body during the execution of this utility Messages Messages Message EPSON POS Keyboard Auto Definition Util ity VX XX XX Description During startup Usage PKLOAD dato file data file definition data file K84 84Key definition data K28 28Key definition data KYL KeyLock definition data 55 5 PKUPLD saved data FLD PKUPLD2 saved data PKL PKMODE definition data Usage EPSON POS Keyboard Auto Definition Util Now transfer 28Key Definition data ity VX XX XX 28 key definition data transfer EPSON POS Keyboard Auto Definition Util Now transfer 84Key Definition data i 84 key definition data transfer EPSON POS Keyboard Auto Definition Util Now transfer KeyLock Definition data Key lock definition data transfer For information see the table POS key s page 4 57 The message like that of PKMODE EXE is displayed atus messages on PKMODE definition data transfer Error messages Message Firmware version error and others Description Firmware version error and others Invalid parameter Parameter error Firmware Communication error Firmware communication error File access error No such file or directory File access error 4 68 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual
258. save the key definition data Check the free capacity on the hard disk drive Download command Key map download Fail Time Out Press any key to continue Could not write the key definition data to the keyboard Upload command Key map upload Fail Time Out Press any key to continue Could not read the key definition data to the keyboard Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility For MS DOS Oufline This utility automatically sets the definition information of the POS keyboard of the IR 320 Command Execute the command in the following format PKLOAD EXE data file Processing Details This utility automatically sets the following data e Saving file for Windows version 28 key definition K28 e Saving file for Windows version 84 key definition K84 e Saving file for Windows version KeyLock definition KYL Rev C Utilities 4 67 e Setting file for this utility PKL Be sure to specify the extension of the specified file because the effectiveness of the specified file is checked with its extension The download function of the upload file is realized by PKUPDT2 EXE Y Note This utility is started from and executed on MS DOS It cannot be executed from the DOS box This utility uses the K B interface for communication with the firmware For this reason do not operate the 28 key keyboard the KeyLock the MSR or the external keyboard during the execution or an error is caused during the data communication and thi
259. se agreement and click Install 3 Installing is completed then the dialog box is displayed Click Restart Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD You can set the HDD to the DMA mode by following the steps below 1 Set the Service Pack 6a CD ROM to the CD ROM drive Execute the Nt4sp6 Support Utils 1386 Dmacheck exe in the Service Pack 6a CD ROM 3 42 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 2 ATAPI DMA Support dialog box appears Set the DMA Detection Status of the Current DMA Usage Channel 0 to enabled and click OK Current DMA Usage Channel 0 Current DMA Usage Channel 1 DMA inuse DMA notinuse DMA Detection Status DMA Detection Status Enabled C Enabled C Disabled Disabled Cancel Help 3 A warning dialog box appears Click Yes IWarning WARNING It is HIGHLY recommended that a user perform a full system backup ee the local lice files and update the system Emergency Repair Disk before using this utility to make changes The changes required to implement DMA Bus Master transfers affect NT hardware detection boot sequence at a very low level Should the system fail to boot following the specified registry changes the user may boot the system by selecting Last Known Good If Last Known Good boot fails the user must recover their system via restoring a tape backup or using the Emergency Repair process Do you wish to proceed Ze _ 4 A finished dial
260. se specified in this manual Doing so may result in fire or improper operation Do not set this product in the unstable place such as on a shaky stand or a place that is not level The product may break or cause injury if it falls Do not use the unit in locations subject to high humidity or dust levels Excessive humidity and dust may cause equipment damage fire or shock Do not stand or place any heavy object on top of this product The equipment may fall or collapse causing breakage and possible injury When leaving this product unused for a long time always unplug it from the outlet to ensure safety The devices of the circuit board may become hot Turn off the power and wait 10 minutes before accessing them Wait more than 10 seconds after turning off the power supply before turning it on again Do not use the product in the place where inflammable liquids gasoline benzine or thinner may be in the air Doing so may cause an explosion or fire Do not drop bump or otherwise subject this product to strong vibration or impact Doing so may damage the product Do not block the openings on this product that protect it from overheating Overheating may lead to fire Do not place this product in a narrow place with bad ventilation such as a closet or a bookcase Do not place this product on a carpet or a cushion Do not cover this product with cloth such as a blanket or a tablecloth Do not connect the unit to an AC
261. selected The only position address that can be selected is DOOO Reserved Memory Length If a position address is set select the memory size for that address The default setting is 64K The only memory size that can be selected is 64K the same as the default setting PCI VGA Palette Snoop When a video card is added or when using an MPEG playback card at the same time the on screen color may not display correctly for a period of time If this occurs you may be able to fix the problem by changing the setting to Enabled The default setting is Disabled Rev C 5 17 BIOS Functions Defaults and Selectable Options The BIOS default and selectable options of each item are as follows Some items are not displayed and cannot be changed depending on the settings of their master items Standard CMOS Features 1 Date Time Item Options Notice Day of the Day of the week Automatically determined by the settings of Year week Month and Day Month Jan Year Month Day Selected from the options Feb Last day of the current month Either 28 30 or 31 is automatically Mar determined according to the specified Apr month When the year is a leap year the May last day of February will automatically Jun be 29 Jul Hour Minute Second Selected from the options Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Day 1 Last day of the current month Year 1999 2099 Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59
262. setting is used to execute the head seek test If the Standard CMOS Features Drive is set as None and the Integrated Peripherals Onboard FDC Controller is changed to Disabled then if the Standard CMOS Features Halt On is set as All Errors or the All But Keyboard setting is used system errors will halt Disabled This setting is used to disable the head seek test Although this setting will reduce the amount of time required to perform the head seek for the floppy during startup it does not perform an accurate error detection of FDD errors Boot Up Num Lock Status This setting turns the NumLock on the keyboard On or OFF executes or does not execute the NumLock command The default setting is OFF Off This setting is used to turn the NumLock Off On This setting is used to turn the NumLock On Gate A20 Option This setting is used to set the access method for a memory space of more than 1MB The default setting should be Normal for Fail Safe and Fast for Optimized Normal This setting is used only for access methods real mode access Pertaining to the conventional AT transposing apparatus which use a keyboard controller This setting is used for the Gate A20 function for the chip set This is the original setting used to perform automatic switching between the real mode and the protect mode Fast Typematic Rate Setting This setting is used to enable disable changes to
263. setup menu to the Floppy On the main menu select Save amp Exit Setup and press Enter The following dialog box appears SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N Press Y and Enter The system will restart Limitation Recovery cannot be performed starting from a hard disk You must perform recovery from a CD ROM 3 14 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Windows NT Pre Installed Model The exclusive EPSON utility and drivers for using IR 320 are pre installed in the HDD with the pre installed Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Installation Procedure Windows NT Installation When the power supply is turned on the installation starts Enter the product key of the WNT label pasted on the product You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later Other software Installation When using OPOS ADK APD Windows printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Formatting the hard disk The hard disk is composed of one partition of up to 4 GB as a system area For a hard disk of more than 4 GB the excess area other than the system area is not yet formatted The start up drive has been formatted to the following file system e File system NTFS e Volume label NTWS40 Pre installed software 1 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Microsoft Windows NT Service Pack 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 00 Service Pack 1 Microsoft Data Access C
264. shock or vibration otherwise the CD ROM CD R RW drive may stop operating Install the CD ROM CD R RW drive by following the steps below 1 Open the front cover of the IR 320 If the front cover is locked unlock it with the key You may need to press in slightly as you turn the key front cover 3 Remove the CD ROM cover Keep this cover because it is not used while the CD ROM CD R RW drive is installed 2 18 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 4 Remove the left side cover by sliding it downward Rev C Setup 2 19 Confidential 7 Push the CD ROM CD R RW drive into the IR 320 from the front being careful not to subject it to shock or vibration and be sure the cables are not pinched Confirm that the projection under the CD ROM CD R RW drive is firmly engaged with the frame projection on the IR 320 If the cable for the HDD unit is in the way of the connection for the CD ROM CD R RW drive remove the HDD unit cable connect the cable for the CD ROM CD R RW drive and re connect the HDD unit cable projection under the CD ROM CD R RW drive screw hole 10 Reattach the HDD cover 2 20 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 11 Reattach the side panel with two screws 12 Reattach the side cover 13 Close the front panel Installing a Front CompactFlash Card Adapter Ol RO7 AN CAUTI
265. sk related errors But Disk Key Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs with the exception of floppy disk or keyboard related errors gt gt 5 6 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Advanced BIOS Features Menu In this menu set the basic BIOS settings such as cache boot up sequence and memory shadowing Table 5 3 Advanced BIOS Features menu Items Virus Warning Description This is the setting for the data write enable disable to the boot sector and partition table For the default setting Fail Safe is Enabled and Optimized is Disabled Enabled This is the setting used to disable the write function Although this setting protects the system from viruses it does not permit execution of FDISK or FORMAT Disabled This is the setting used to enable the write function Although FDISK and FORMAT can be executed using this setting it does not protect the system from viruses Always use the default setting External Cache This setting enables disables the L2 Cache inside the CPU Enabled Enables the L2 Cache This is the normal setting Disabled Disables the L2 Cache This setting may have an adverse effect on the system performance CPU L2 Cahce This is the setting that enables disables the ECC check for the L2 Cache in the CPU The default ECC Checking setting is Enabled Enabled This setting is used to perform the
266. ssed the test will terminate and the message DM display test done is displayed in the message area If the DM status is Disable or No communication this test is not executed m Drawer kick out test The drawer kick out test opens the cash drawer Check to see if the cash drawer opens normally The TM printer has two drawer kick out drive signals signal 1 and signal 2 This test checks the drawer kick out drive signal 1 only If a password is set for the drawer kick out test enter the password when the drawer kick out test is executed If the TM status is Disable or No communication this test is not executed Q COM1 COM2 COM5 COM6 loop back The transmission reception test for the serial port is executed Because transmission and reception are performed through a single target port the loop back connector needs to be connected to the target port The COM port test checks DTR DSR CTS RTS TXD and RXD signals When the test finishes normally OK is displayed in the message area of the screen When the test fails an error message is displayed 1 LPT1 loop back The LPT1 signal lines are tested Because transmission and reception are performed through a single target port the loop back connector needs to be connected to the target port The LPT1 port test checks STROBE ACK DATAO BUSY AUTO FEED PAPER EMPTY ERR INIT SELECT IN and SELECT signals In the loop back test the data line test is not executed Data line check must
267. ssignment of parallel connector signals No Signal name 1 0 Description 1 STROBE O Strobe signal 2 PDO O Data signals 3 PD1 O 4 PD2 O 5 PD3 O 6 PD4 O 7 PDS O 8 PD6 O 9 PD7 O 10 ACK Acknowledge receiving complete signal LOW Receiving enabled 1 BUSY Busy signal LOW Busy 12 PE Paper error signal HIGH Error 13 SLCT Selection signal HIGH select 14 ATFD O Auto feed signal LOW Paper feed 15 ERR Error signal LOW Error 16 INIT O Initialization signal LOW initialize 17 SLIN O Printer selection signal HIGH Select 18 to 25 GND Ground following a signal name indicates active LOW See the IEEE 1284 Specification for data signals in the EPP and ECP modes External TM Power Connector The power connector for the TM printer is located on the rear panel Connect the power cable for the TM printer to the external TM power connector This connector is a Hoshiden made TCS7960 53 Use the dedicated power cable for the external TM power connector e Ratings 24 V 3 7 2 A The current capacity includes the currents used in the DKD connector and the customer display connector 7 10 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Q Note When an exclusive printer unit is connected the external TM power connector cannot be used Usable printers Printer tray mounted type TM U200 series M H6000 series
268. ssword setting differs according to the setting for Advanced BIOS Features Security Option See Password Setting Set User Password This function sets the system protection password The password can be set for up to 8 characters case sensitive The input demand timing for the password setting differs according to the setting for Advanced BIOS Features Security Option See Password Setting Save amp Exit Setup This is executed at restart after saving CMOS content changes Exit Without Saving This is executed at restart without saving CMOS changes cleared 5 4 BIOS Functions Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Standard CMOS Features Menu In this menu set the system clock and the calendar set the disk drive parameters and the type of video subsystem select among the error types that interrupt the power on self test POST and so on Table 5 2 Standard CMOS Features menu Items Description Date Sets the date BIOS automatically determines the day of the week Press lt or gt to move to the desired field date month year Press PgUp or PgDn to incrementally move the setting or type the desired value into the field Time Sets the clock in 24 hour format For example 1 p m is 13 00 00 Press or gt to move to the desired field Press PgUp or PgDn to incrementally move the setting or type the desired value into the field Rev C IDE Primary
269. stem over to the battery from the AC Line with Windows 2000 when the battery unit OI R03 option is attached For details see page 4 67 Rev C OS and Drivers 3 37 Install the AC line tool using the following procedure 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win2K Epsbatt EPSBATT EXE 2 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the AC line tool Uninstall the AC line tool using the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and select Add Remove Programs 2 The Add Remove Programs dialog box is displayed Click Change or Remove Programs to display a list of the currently installed programs Change Remove will be displayed when EPSON AC Line watching is selected Click Change Remove 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click OK Power button prohibited setting tool for windows 2000 The Power button prohibited setting tool is the tool setting the registry to prohibit the shift to the shutdown and the stand by mode even if the front power switch is pressed It can prevent the shutdown of the system even if the front power switch is pressed by mistake Note on using When Power Options of Windows are updated the setting is cleared so always set after updating the Power Options How to use 1 Insert the Driver
270. system Protection Circuit Unit When the protection circuit is activated it automatically shuts off the power If recovery is possible turn off the main power switch wait for more than 2 minutes and then turn on the main power switch Q Short circuit protection Shuts down the system when the output terminal output power supply is short circuited Recovery is possible CL Over voltage protection Protection circuit to prevent the output terminals from exceeding the rated voltage Recovery is possible 0 Overheating protection Shuts down the system when excessive heat is detected in some element within the power supply unit Recovery is possible 1 Input power fuse Shuts down the system when the input current exceeds the specified value Trouble within the power supply unit is possible If the fuse has blown the whole power supply unit should be replaced Recovery is impossible Rev C Hardware Specifications 7 7 1 AC output Fuse If the fuse has blown remove and exchange the fuse in the fuse holder on the back of the power supply Q Electrical Capacity to External Devices The total power capacities available to the devices that receive power supply from the board inserted into the PCI slot the serial ports COM1 COM2 COM5 and COM6 the keyboard mouse and the USB port are shown below Be sure the current consumptions do not exceed the total power capacities listed below as to the voltages 5 V 3 3 V 12 V 12
271. t set 115200 bps For the DM D500 set SW6 SW7 and SW8 of DIP switch bank 1 DSW1 as indicated in the following table SW1 6 SW1 7 SW1 8 Transfer speed bps O ON ON 2400 OFF ON ON 4800 O OFF ON 9600 OFF OFF ON 19200 O ON OFF 38400 OFF ON OFF 57600 O OFF OFF 115200 7 Cut off the portion of the customer display cover shown below Cut off the three connecting pieces burrs with a cutter cut this off A 2 66 Setup Rev C Confidential IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Device Diagnostics Utility By using the Device Diagnostics Utility you can confirm that the customer display is connected correctly and displays correctly Device Diagnostics Utility is displayed when the power supply of the IR 320 is turned on and then the F10 key is pressed while the POST Power On Self Test screen is displayed DM area Confirm the communication speed and the status of the customer display Device Tests menu WhWhen executing the DM display test the test message is displayed in the customer display Refer to Device Diagnostics Utility in Appendix A BIOS Functions about the operation of the Device Ddiagnostics Utiity Installing a Mouse Keyboard A mouse or a keyboard can be connected to the keyboard mouse connector on the IR 320 keyboard mouse connector To connect both of them you must use a commercially available bran
272. te The administrator modifies the registry key Method Select Programs Epson Touch Panel Tool Touch Panel Configuration Tool from the Start menu Click OK There is no need to do any other operation Various Configurations Windows 2000 Various configurations are executed during the setup procedure and the keyboard and the mouse are automatically set To change their configurations use the control panel Setting the Network A dialog box prompting the user to manually install the network is displayed Set the network settings by the following procedure 1 2 Open the Control Panel then select Network and Dial up Connections The Network and Dial up Connections dialog box is displayed Select Make New Connection The Network Connection Wizard starts If the location information setting has not been completed by this time the Location Information dialog box is displayed at this time Set the settings in accordance with the environment then click OK If all the location information has been set this dialog box is not displayed Proceed to item 5 and set the settings in subsequent steps The Telephone and Modem Option dialog box is displayed Select the location set in the previous item then click OK The Network Connection Wizard opening dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 8 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 6 The Network Connection Type dialog box is displayed Set th
273. teens 5 18 Standard CMOS Features ashe dead 4 Peo Mae olen AA Ry ea AA 5 18 Advanced BIOS Features 000 c ccc tn teen ene ene nee n tenet nent nent neas 5 21 Advanced Chipset Features alata id feng So ab aaa nelle setae cea wis 5 23 Integrated Peripherals senese aa r E E E Renee A te ee Se ds 5 23 Power Management Setup s r oc 0g tced cde a ewe Sas ee beeen A 5 27 PnP PCL Contigutations 3 2 02 64 is HE a ee Re ad eee ed at hea Hes 5 29 Setting a PasswOtde moriria rtorras dale acca tre a a AAA ssh A A 5 31 Power On Self Test POSI der hanere Siete eee a alt Pte a Bh Sp Oe ee ee dos 5 32 Chapter 6 Device Diagnostics Utility Conditions for Running Device Diagnostics 06 6 6 rr 6 1 Startip Exit Initializes e cess Sade odie Pea es a Se A See E ES Aden ae hes Lala 6 3 Screen Layouts borni a o da BSS a ee adas 6 3 Use for the device diagnostic utility 0 6 rar rr 6 7 Operating Procedure st tiie sce atti tes hea ek MER Mee dG Ghee Meas peat ded eel wh 6 7 Rev C xiii Confidential A E A atn te sonien ante ca ae OY Pet heated carl eee ka ag 2 6 8 Device Test Menu 2 cso cies a A 6 11 Chapter 7 Hardware Specifications System Diagram sreo e Se id i a gl eld oedhed dino e Goat A POA Ratt 7 1 System Memory 2d Si A Wb ona sido 72 VOM ata O A E 7 3 DMA A A AAA A A AA Re Ne A AE 7 4 System Mterrupts macia ti a bone A a a 7 4 Hardware Specifications iii a A A Sa AS 7 5 CPU Geleron PPGA cir A Sa
274. that the key top label and colors can be confirmed To close this window click the X on the right end of the title bar Exit When Exit is clicked the 28 Key Definition utility is exited List of Definable Keys Following is a list of definable keys for the supplied utilities Yes means can be defined No means cannot be defined in the table below Definable keys Utility 28KEYCFG EXE OS Windows XP 2000 NT 98 Language Any language Keyboard 101 102 106 series Keys that cannot be defined Print Screen Scroll Lock Pause Num Lock Caps Lock Windows Shift depending on OS Alt Ctrl Menu Ctrl Alt Del Alt Esc Alt Tab Ctrl Esc Limits on key combinations Single Shift Ctrl Alt Esc Yes Yes No No Fn Function Key Yes Yes Yes Yes 13457890 Yes Yes Yes Yes 26 Yes Yes Yes Yes a z Yes Yes Yes Yes Tab Yes Yes Yes No BS Yes Yes Yes Yes Space Yes Yes Yes Yes Enter Yes Yes Yes Yes JA Yes Yes Yes Yes Rev C Utilities 4 23 Definable keys continued Sir ea or Yes Yes Yes Yes Ins Yes Yes Yes Yes Del Yes Yes Yes Yes Home Yes Yes Yes Yes End Yes Yes Yes Yes PageUp Yes Yes Yes Yes PageDown Yes Yes Yes Yes T Yes Yes Yes Yes J Yes Yes Yes Yes gt Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ten key Yes Yes Yes Yes Ten key Yes No Yes Yes Enter Ten key Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 1234567809 len key Yes
275. the New button is clicked AN Key Configuration has already been changed Save it before load new configration If the Load button is clicked 28KeyCfg x Key Configuration has already been changed Save it before load other configration No cea Reading the Settings Read the saved settings by the following procedure 1 Clicking the Load button displays the Open File dialog box A E Look in 28KB Confit e CK EB a test 128 File name sam PLE Files of type zs Keyboard Config file 128 y Cancel J Open as read only 2 Select the file name then click the Open button to read the selected settings Creating New Settings Click the New button to clear the settings used up to the present and set new settings All the key settings are cleared 4 38 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Displaying the Keytops Clicking the View button opens the View window and enables the keytop labels colors and fonts etc to be confirmed Close the window by clicking the X button on the right end of the title bar Printing the Keytops Clicking the Print button opens the Print dialog box Click the OK button to start printing Epson EPL 8100 Close Clicking the Exit button closes the Layer 28 Definition Utility Layer 28 key Auto Definition Utility for Windows Function This utility loads definition files created by the Layer 28 Keyboard Definition Utility It is used for
276. the TM Printer use the following settings Q Handshaking for the TM xxR Printer should be set to RTS CTS LI Set DIP switch 1 3 of the TM xxR Printer to OFF This is the default setting I Set Jumper JP32 on the POS board to OPEN The default setting is SHORTED D The recommended setting for the Windows FIFO buffer is disabled This prevents timing delays caused by the data being held in the buffer If customers want the setting to be enabled the manufacturer recommends that the transmission buffer size be less than 16 bytes 1 The Customer Display is controlled by DTR DSR handshaking Rev C Serial Handshaking Appendix C 5 Confidential The illustration below shows the final electrical connection With Jumper JP32 on the POS Board Appendix C 6 Serial Handshaking Rev C EPSON SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
277. ther Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages losses costs or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of accident misuse or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications repairs or alterations to this product or excluding the U S failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation s operating and maintenance instructions 1 Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable against any damages or problems arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original EPSON Products or EPSON Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation Rev C 1 TRADEMARKS EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Intel and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation BaySwap is a trademark of Phoenix Technologies Ltd General Notice Other product and company names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies ii Rev C Revision Information IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 5 1 14 15 16 27 Revision Page Altered Item and Contents Rev A First release Rev B 1 16 Change the DSW 1 settings 3 25 Add the OS Recovery method of step 4 B 3 Add the Jum
278. tional Features Known Issues Install now Cancel 5 When installing is completed according to the instructions on the screen click Restart now and reboot the system Uninstalling the network driver 1 Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel 2 Select Add Remove Programs in the control panel 3 Select Intel R PRO Ethernet Adapter and Software 4 Click Add Remove 5 The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed Click OK 6 The dialog box to reboot the system is displayed Click Yes to reboot the system Installing the Video Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive and start Win98 Video Win9Xe67 EXE 2 The Readme txt dialog box is displayed Click Next 3 The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome screen is displayed Click Next 4 The License Agreement dialog box is displayed Click Yes 5 Installing is completed and the Reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the video driver Uninstalling cannot be done 3 50 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Installing the Sound Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 4 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win98 Sound SETUP EXE The Se
279. to the Microsoft Windows OS whether an FDD is installed or For WIN 95 not more exactly the IRQ 6 status The default setting is No No No is the setting used when no communication is made to the OS This is the normal setting Yes This setting is used when an FDD is not installed or when the necessary software has not been installed More exactly this setting is used to communicate to the OS that the IRQ 6 used by the FDC has been opened Please refer to the section on floppy disks regarding the use of FDD Video BIOS This setting is used to specify whether shadowing is performed or not for each address space Shadow when a PC card with an expanded ROM BIOS is attached to the slot All default settings are set to Disabled Disablea This setting is used when shadowing of the target address spaces is not performed More exactly if no PC card is attached to the slot then it means that the PC card does not have an expanded ROM BIOS mounted on it Enabled This setting is used when shadowing of the target address spaces is performed More exactly it means that the PC card attached to the slot has an expanded ROM BIOS such as an SCIS network card mounted on it Rev C 5 9 BIOS Functions Advanced Chipset Features Menu In this menu set the items that rely on the chipset on the main board such as the memory and the bus timing setting Since these settings are executed via Load Optimized Defaults they are the optimum se
280. tting Reads the stored settings Saves the current settings Rev C Label Code Font Color Prog One Prog All View Print Option Key Definitions IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Opens the Label dialog box Opens the Code dialog box Opens the Font dialog box Opens the color specification dialog box When a button is selected clicking this button causes only the key corresponding to the selected button to be programmed The settings of all the buttons are programmed Opens the View window and displays the key tops Displays the Print dialog box Displays the Option dialog box Each key on the screen corresponds to an actual key top on the keyboard unit Key tops are defined by the following procedure 1 Select the key which you would like to set the code for Clicking it once more cancels the selection 2 The Code dialog box opens when the Code button is clicked Rev C Select the list box with the layer name where the key code is to be set by clicking it with the mouse Input the code to be set for the selected key from the keyboard A code with a length of up to 63 bytes can be input Repeat the same procedure inputting the codes to be set for the keys in each layer Clicking the OK button enables the settings and closes the Code dialog box Clicking the Cancel button cancels the settings Clicking the Clear button clears the code input up to that point Utilities 4
281. ttings for the system and generally do not need to be changed Be aware that because these settings pertain to the control timing the apparatus may fail to start up if an incompatible setting is executed Table 5 4 Advanced Chipset Features menu Items SDRAM CAS Latency Time Description This setting sets the number of clocks for the CAS waiting time for the memory the tim required from when the address is specified until the data can be read out Default setting is 3 Do not change the default setting System BIOS This setting enables disables the System BIOS cache The default setting is Disabled Cacheable Disabled Set this to disable the system BIOS cache Enabled Set this to enable the system BIOS cache Video BIOS This setting enables disables the Video BIOS cache The default setting is Disabled Cacheable Disabled Set this to disable the system BIOS cache Enabled Set this to enable the system BIOS cache CPU Latency CPU and Chip set GMCH this setting pertains to the access timing for the Graphics Memory Timer Control Hub The default setting is Disabled The normal setting is Disabled Delayed Always set this to Enabled Transaction CAS Latency This setting sets the number of clocks for the video cache memory CAS waiting period the amount of time required after the address is specified until the data can be read out There are 2 options a setting of 2 or
282. tup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that the Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system The Sound Driver is installed after the system is rebooted Uninstalling the sound driver 1 2 3 Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel Select Add Remove Programs in the control panel Select SoundMAX Click Add Remove The Setup Type dialog box is displayed Select Remove all and click Next The reboot dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish Installing the Touch Panel Driver This is installed by the exclusive installation program 1 Insert the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 in the CD ROM drive Start Win98 Touch EPSTP9x EXE The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Click Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed Input the folder and click Next The default setting is C Program Files EPSON TouchPanel The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Confirm that Yes I want to restart my computer now is selected and click Finish to reboot the system Uninstalling the touch panel driver 1 2 3 Rev C Select Start Menu Settings and open the control panel Select Add Remove Programs in the control panel Select EPSON Touch Panel Driver
283. tween AC power on and the first Wake On LAN A 2 Wake On LAN Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Wake On LAN Method Details Magic Packet Received In the Magic Packet mode when the LAN controller detects a data pattern consisting of 6 FF bytes and 16 repetitions of the media access control MAC address it issues a wake up request This special pattern cannot occur in normal communications and must be sent deliberately Magic Packet data for a client with a MAC address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 for example is as indicated below for example data excluding the destination address self address CRC FF FF FF FF FF FF 11 22 33 445566 11 22 33 4455 66 11 22 33 4455 66 11 2233 44 55 66 1 2 3 4 11 22 33 4455 66 112233445566 1122 33 4455 66 112233 4455 66 11 22 33 4455 66 5 6 7 8 9 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 4455 66 11 22 33 4455 66 11 22 33 4455 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 10 11 12 13 14 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 15 16 Reference Information MAC Address Check the machine s MAC address using the following methods A Windows 98 Type winipcfg in the command line and press Enter 1 Windows NT 2000 XP Type ipconfig all in the command line and press Enter Rev C Wake On LAN A 3 Confidential A 4 Wake On LAN Rev C Appendix B IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The IR 310 Compared fo the IR 320 It is possible to use the IR 320 as the successor model t
284. ue to average and thus stabilize the touch position The Stabilization setting sets the number of times coordinate data are sampled Coordinates Data This sets the coordinate data sampling interval within a range of 10 to 155 ms Sampling Cycle The default setting is 10 The coordinate data sampling interval sets the time coordinate data are sent to the system from the touch panel device On This sets the tap sound On or Off The tap sound is output if this item is checked The default setting is On Frequency This sets the tap sound frequency within a range of 37 to 16383 Hz Dragging the slider left or right changes the setting value The default setting is 600 Hz Port This displays the port used This item cannot be set here IRQ This displays the IRQ used This item cannot be set here I O Address This displays the I O address used This item cannot be set here Rev C OS and Drivers 3 61 Version Display Function The following screen is displayed if the Version tab is clicked in EPSON Touch Panel Configuration Tool xj Calibration Environment Settings Driver 1 03 Configuration Tool 1 02 Right Button Emulator 1 02 Copyright C 2000 SEIKO EPSON Corp All Rights Reserved Cancel Apply Help The version information for the Driver Configuration Tool and Right Button Emulator are displayed Double Click Permissible Range Setting Function The double click permissible range setting functi
285. ult settings These are DTR DSR flow control for the TM printer and RTS CTS flow control for the Customer Display Possible Combinations of Handshaking for the TM Printers and the Customer Displays When a TM T88IIR TM U210AR or TM H3000R printer is installed on the IR 320 the DTR DSR line is internally connected to the TM Printer As a result of this customers should use RTS CTS line for handshaking with the Customer Display However if the customers change a setting of JP32 they can use the following flow control combination TM Printer control RTS CTS CustomerDisplay control DTR DSR Connection Differences for Customer Displays Unlike the TM printers that use a pass through connection with the Customer Display the printers and displays for the IR 320 system have separate connections for separate flow control External TM printers also require separate flow control if a Y connection is selected rather than a pass through connection Flow Control Selections for Different Applications If an application program is written in Visual Basic and MSCOMM is used only RTS CTS and XON XOFF are available for selection In this case you can set the TM Printer and the Customer Display as follows using the ActiveX control MSCOMM TM Printer control XON XOFF CustomerDisplay control RTS CTS Y Notes CustomerDisplay control cannot be guaranteed with XON XOFF DTR DSR handshaking is not an option with the MSCOMM control Rev C Seria
286. unctions BIOS Setup The BIOS setup menu utility is used to configure the system s operating environment When setting up this product for the first time be sure to run this program If you change the operating environment run this program again Operating Procedure How to use setup To execute BIOS setup requires a PS 2 compatible keyboard BIOS setup cannot be run from the touch panel alone Start the BIOS setup utility using the following procedure 1 Connect the keyboard to the keyboard connector 2 Turn the power on to start up the IR 320 3 Press Del during the POST process and the BIOS setup utility will start up How to exit Follow the steps below to enable your changes for a new configuration and to exit the BIOS setup utility 1 Display the BIOS setup main menu 2 Select Save amp Exit Setup and press Enter 3 The message SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N is displayed Press Y and Enter in this order to exit the BIOS setup utility validate the changed settings and reboot the system Follow the procedure below to cancel changes and exit the BIOS setup utility 1 Display the BIOS setup main menu 2 Select Exit Without Saving and press Enter 3 The message Quit Without Saving Y N is displayed Press Y and Enter 4 The BIOS setup utility finishes and the system reboots with the new configuration canceled ZN CAUTION Do not change the settings of any items other than those specified in this ma
287. unit is connected A three terminal regulator for regulating the electric current is mounted on the riser board Ethernet Controller The Ethernet controller is built in the Chipset Intel 82801BA This enables operation at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps and wakeup from the LAN When the main power switch is on when AC power is supplied wakeup from the power off state is enabled To enable the wakeup Wake Up by PCI card should be set enabled in the BIOS setup The operating status of LAN can be confirmed by the LED of the Ethernet connector 7 6 Hardware Specifications Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The MAC address specific to each controller is described on the seal attached to the main board remove the side panel which is on the left side of the unit For Windows NT 2000 XP the MAC address can be obtained by using the following command ipconfig all ZN CAUTION If connection is made directly from an outdoor overhead LAN cable the connected equioment may be damaged by lightning When connecting to such a cable the connection should be routed through a device to counter the surge otherwise do not use the connection Power Supply Unit Input Specification Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC 10 Frequency rating 50 60 Hz 3 Hz Input current 6 0 A 100 V to 4 0 A 240 V except the power for AC outlet Outlet current 3A rating The output of the AC outlet is interlocking with the power on off control in the
288. up Complete dialog box is displayed Click the Finish button to end the installation Uninstall Procedure Uninstall this utility by the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel 2 Double click on Add Remove Programs 3 Click the Install Remove tab then select 28K B Config Utilities 4 Layers Supported for Windows NT from the list box 4 28 Utilities Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Windows XP 2000 NT Ey Add Remove Programs Currently installed programs 28 K B Config Utilities 4 Layers Supported for l Windows NT Windows 98 B Confia Utilities 4 Layers Supported for wii 4 Click the Add Remove button 5 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed Click the Yes button Confirm File Deletion Rev C Utilities 4 29 6 If the following dialog box is displayed and you are asked to confirm whether to delete shared files click the Yes to All button Remove Shared File l x The system indicates that the following shared file is no longer used by any programs If any programs are still using this file and it is removed those programs may not function Are you sure you want to remove the shared file Leaving this file will not harm your system If you are not sure what to do it is suggested that you choose to not remove this shared component File name KBCAPT3 SY S Located in CAWINNT System32 DRIVERS YesToall No Noto All 7 Ifthe following d
289. urn Value 0to3 The currently selected layer No 20 Communications error 21 Opening error Q Notes This library cannot be used during programming with 28keyCfg etc 0D oO O O during reading or writing of the settings 4 42 Utilities Copy LYFUNC DLL and PKFUNC DLL to the same folder as the application program The keyboard and mouse do not respond during reading or writing of the settings Do not perform any operations that would generate an interrupt such as tapping the touch panel Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual 84 key Configuration Utility for Windows XP 2000 NT 98 Start By default the 84 key configuration utility is stored in the following directory on the hard disk C Program Files Key Config 84keycfg exe You can start the 84 key configuration utility by double clicking this file in Windows Explorer or by selecting Program Key Configuration Utilities Configure 84 Keyboard from the menu When the program starts the following screen is displayed gdxeuboard Configuraton Utility Rev C Utilities 4 43 Speed Buttons Eleven speed buttons are displayed below the title bar for the 84 key configuration keytop setting program By clicking these speed buttons you can call up the desired function quickly Exit New Load Save Labe Code Color Prog One Prog All View Print 4 44 Utilities One k New Save Label Color Prog Print All Exits the 84 key k
290. ut test 1 Select Drawer Password from the pull down menu Enter the password 2 Type the current password and press Enter 3 The message New appears 4 To delete the password only press Enter and the password will be deleted To set a new password type the new password and press Enter 5 The message Re enter appears Type the password again and press Enter to confirm the new password Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 9 Confidential Setting drawer ON time The drawer ON time option sets the length of time of the voltage signal necessary to open the cash drawer Device tests Initialize Exit Drawer Password 1 20 SEIKO EPSON Corp All R M B Information COM Por COM1 COM2 Drawer ON time To set the time select the Drawer ON Time option from the setup pull down menu The dialog boxis displayed Specify the length of time of the voltage signal in units of milliseconds that the cash drawer requires Any value within a range of 0 to 500 ms can be set The time that has been set here is rounded to the minimum units that can be set for the TM printer connected The minimum unit is 10 ms for the TM 930 series and 2 ms for the other TMs For the appropriate value to be entered see the instruction manual for the cash drawer 6 10 Device Diagnostics Utility Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual M B Information The device property configuration of the CPU and Memory setting of the Video Sound and Ethernet
291. utility starts the following screen appears p Device tests Initialize Exit The device self diagnostic utility screen is divided into the following five areas L TM Drawer Y DM Y COM Ports Rev C Device Diagnostics Utility 6 3 Confidential CL LpT1 TM Drawer Ll Messages The TM Drawer area of the device diagnostics screen displays communication settings cash drawer driving pulse signal width and the status for the TM printer and cash drawer Table 6 2 TM DM information Setting Description TM model Displays the model name depending on the type of TM printer attached TM port Displays the TM printer connection you selected when you started device diagnostics TM reset signal ndicates the signal and signal definition this product is using to reset the TM printer You see None here because this printer does not have a reset signal Baud rate ndicates the baud rate that device diagnostics is using to communicate with the TM printer and DM display Word length ndicates the word length that device diagnostics is using to communicate with the TM printer Parity ndicates whether device diagnostics is using parity to communicate with the TM printer Drawer ON time Di splays the pulse width of the signal for opening the cash drawer TM status ndicates the status of the TM printer S Table A 11 Drawer status Displays the status of the
292. ver the system is on Model Configurations The IR 320 can be configured with the following optional units 0 LCD units with touch panel SVGA LCD unit with touch panel 264 mm 10 4 color TFT Model name 310 mm 12 2 color TFT Model name 310 mm 12 2 color TFT Model name 1 POS keyboard units 84 key Model name 28 key Model name Q Printer units Thermal printer 58 mm 80 mm 2 3 3 2 Model name Serial dot impact printer Model name Thermal receipt with slip Model name L MSR units ISO JIS I tracks 1 2 and 3 Model name L Customer display units 20 x 2 line display Model name 20 x 2 line display Model name 256 x 64 dots graphic display Model name QO Battery unit for IR 320 IR 310 Model name For Europe only project base For Europe not longer available Rev C DM LR104T DM LR121SL DM LR1215V DM KR084 DM KR028 TM T88IIIR TM U210AR TM H3000R DM MR123 DM D110 DM D210 DM D500 OI R03 021 IR 320 System Overview 1 7 LY CD ROM drive for IR 320 IR 310 Model name OI R06 002 LY CD R RW drive for IR 320 IR 310 Model name OI R06 202 An application that writes to the CD R RW must be added LY Front CompactFlash Adapter for IR 320 IR 310 Model name OI RO7 LY Memory 256MB Model name OI DIMM 256 128MB Model name OIJ DIMM 128 1 HDD 2 5 HDD Model name OIJ HDD 300 3 5 HDD Model name OJ HDD Q TM printer tray For TM H6000 Model name OI RO01 022 For other TMs Model na
293. vers for using the IR 320 are on the Driver CD ROM included with the IR 320 If the operating system is pre installed the drivers are also installed OS and Drivers 3 1 Rev C Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 In case you use a locally procured OS on the IR 320 the drivers for using the peripheral devices are on this CD ROM The CD ROM directory is shown below Root DOS62 Cdrom Network Touch WIN98 Chipset Dissw Epsbatt Logon Network Sound Touch Video WINNT Logon Network Sound Touch Video WIN2K Chipset Dissw Epsbatt Epserial Logon Network Sound Touch Video WINXP Chipset Epsbatt Epserial Network Touch Video COMMON OPOSADK APDRV TMDRV KEYCFG WIN DISK1 DOS 3 2 OS and Drivers CDVER TAG Drivers for MS DOS CD ROM drivers Network drivers Touch Panel drivers Drivers for Windows98 Chipset drivers Power button prohibited setting tool AC line tool Logon tool Network drivers Sound drivers Touch Panel drivers Video drivers Drivers for Windows NT Logon tool Network drivers Sound drivers Touch Panel drivers Video drivers Drivers for Windows2000 Chipset drivers Power button prohibited setting tool AC line tool Serial Driver Logon tool Network drivers Sound drivers Touch Panel drivers Video drivers
294. ware from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 3 4 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Formatting the hard disk The hard disk is composed of one partition of up to 10 GB as a system area For a hard disk of more than 10 GB the excess area other than the system area is not yet formatted This drive can be converted to NTFS using the Convert command Use the disk administrator when creating a drive in the unused area The start up drive has been formatted to the following file system e File system FAT32 e Volume label Windows 2000 Pre installed software m C O C U O O U ov A U wv Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 Intel Chipset software installation utility Intel Video driver Intel Network driver Analog Devices Sound driver EPSON Touch Panel driver EPSON Logon tool 1 EPSON DM MS Series setup utility 1 EPSON Power button prohibited setting tool 1 EPSON AC line tool 1 EPSON Serial driver 1 EPSON CD ROM driver for DOS 2 Y Note Le These are not installed during the auto installation procedure 2 When using the OS Recovery Rev C OS and Drivers 3 5 Version of the Pre installation HDD To confirm the version of the HDD see the file HDVER TAG in the root directory of the boot drive This file is text formatted and can be read using Notepad or a similar text editor The file HDVER TAG has the following contents H
295. wer Management in the Start menu of Windows 2 Power Management Properties is displayed Click the Power Schemes tab Power Management Properties Rev C OS and Drivers 3 67 3 Select the time in the Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off hard disks option Power Management Properties _ Saves Delete After 1 hour After 2 hours After 3 hours Alter 4 hours After 5 hours Never 4 Click OK When there is no HDD access for the time set the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SP6a Controlling the HDD motor is done through the BIOS For the details see Chapter 5 BIOS Functions MS DOS Ver 6 22 Controlling the HDD motor is done through the BIOS For the details see Chapter 5 BIOS Functions Shift to the HDD power ON When access to HDD occurs the motor of HDD begins to start and the HDD becomes accessible 3 68 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual Chapter 4 Utilities This chapter covers the utilities and development software provided for the IR 320 Types of Utilities The utilities and development software for the IR 320 are listed below Utilities for MSR DM MR123 These utilities are used to set the functions for the MSR and write them into the keyboard firmware Utility Utility name OS Page Keyboard firmware setting utility PKMODE32 EXE Windows
296. witch The resulting power off condition is called mechanical off When the battery unit is attached remove it Unplug the power cable Confirm that power supplies to all peripheral units are off and unplug the connection cables from them Operation Testing Products The operation confirmation products are the ones that are built in included or connected to EPSON POS products and their operation has been confirmed by EPSON EPSON can offer reference information for the selection of peripheral devices to the customer who constructs a system using an EPSON POS product Please ask EPSON or the selling agent what kind of device can be used This operation confirmation evaluates the operation of the products in a usual environment but does not guarantee the operation Therefore the customer is basically responsible for the procurement and the evaluation of the equipment Rev C Setup 2 3 Confidential How to Install Options Peripheral Units See the following pages for instructions on setting up each option or peripheral Option Peripheral Page nstalling a DIMM Memory 2 5 nstalling a 2 5 HDD Unit OI HDD 1 2 7 nstalling a 3 5 HDD Unit OI HDD 1 2 11 nstalling a CD ROM Drive CD R RW Drive OI R06 2 2 17 nstalling a Front CompactFlash Card Adapter OI RO7 2 2 21 nstalling an LCD Unit 2 24 nstalling an 84 Key Keyboard Unit DM KRO84 DM KRO8
297. with the string The default is HDE Replaces the JIS II type start flag of the MSR with the string The default is 20th Replaces the JIS II type end flag of the MSR with the string The default is 7th Enables the buzzer sound when the magnetic card is read This is the default setting When the magnetic card is read in order the buzzer sounds once When an error is caused to the magnetic card reading the buzzer sounds three times The LED lights up at the same time Invalidates the sound loaded from the card with the MSR123 and only illuminates the LED Specifies the track that enables the MSR decode The following four characters can be specified 1 ISO JIS1 type Track 1 2 ISO JIS1 type Track 2 3 ISO JIS1 type Track 3 J JIS2 type When the same character is specified more than once an error is caused The default is 123 MSR1 is MSR 12 and MSR3 is MSR 23 Sets the scan code conversion table for converting the MSR data into the scan code This is used for any keyboard other than the U S 101 key keyboard and the Japan 106 key keyboard Displays the trace information to the standard output For example this can be saved in a file by using the redirect Enables the trace function Disables the trace function default value Sets variable xxh to the yyh address of the system Displays the values of the system variables from 00h to FFh When zzh is speci
298. writing in the K B firmware 1 The keyboard firmware setting utility The Windows version the MS DOS version Backup of the setting contents Please make the file described the setting contents with the text editor and back it up Write the backup file in the K B firmware with the definition data automatic setting utility This way can be used to set up the same setting for more than one system and it can be used as the batch file 1 The definition data automatic setting utility The Windows version the MS DOS version Rev C Setup 2 51 Confidential Installing a Printer Tray Dedicated printers are designed especially for the IR systems Any of these printers can be installed directly on the main body When a dedicated printer is not used a printer tray can be installed and other types of TM printer can be installed on the printer tray Two types of printer tray can be connected to the IR 320 Model name Compatible printers OIl RO1 001 TM T88 series TM U200 series OI RO1 022 TM H6000 series Mount the printer tray by following the procedure below If a TM printer is not being used begin with step 3 1 Remove the portion shadowed in the figure below from the printer tray Cut off the two plastic connecting pieces burrs with a cutter or nippers and pull the piece down toward you Bend the part back and forth two or three times so that it can be cut off Pass the cable through the new opening ZN CAUTION
299. ws printer drivers and Unimini install the software from the Driver CD ROM for the IR 320 Setup procedure Q Note If you set up Windows 2000 on your IR 320 the system stops displaying to the LCD panel at the time of rebooting after all setup has been done This is because the video driver supplied together with the Windows 2000 CD does not support the internal LCD interface To avoid this phenomenon please install Windows 2000 and the video driver by using the following instructions Windows 2000 is set up by using the following procedure 1 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IR 320 Insert the CD ROM of Windows 2000 in the CD ROM drive and boot up the system The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed Press Enter The License Agreement is displayed Read it through and confirm your agreement to the terms And then press the F8 key I agree Input the necessary information and continue the installation according to the instructions on the screen When copying of the file is completed reboot the system again according to the instructions on the screen 3 32 OS and Drivers Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual Video Driver Installation Method 1 2 Start COMMAND PROMPT by pressing Shift F10 in the Locale Setting Change the CD ROM Eject the CD ROM of Windows 2000 and Insert the Driver CD ROM of IR 320 Execute Win2k Video WIN2K_XPE67 EXE in the Driver
300. x C 3 Confidential The illustration below shows the final electrical connection With Jumper JP32 POS Board SHORTED Default Device Settings When Software Requires DTR DSR Handshaking To set DTR DSR handshaking check that the IR 320 and the TM Printer use the following settings m m m m m Handshaking for the TM xxR Printer should be set to DTR DSR Set DIP switch 1 3 of the TM xxR Printer to OFF This is the default setting Set Jumper JP32 on the POS board to SHORTED This is the default setting The recommended setting for the Windows FIFO buffer is disabled This prevents timing delays caused by the data being held in the buffer If customers want the setting to be enabled the manufacturer recommends that the transmission buffer size be less than 16 bytes The Customer Display is controlled by RTS CTS handshaking Q Notes You cannot use RTS CTS handshaking to control the TM Printer You cannot use XON XOFF handshaking to control the Customer Display because the Customer Display can use DTR DSR handshaking only The Windows serial driver DLL Visual Basic command or MFC control the DTR DSR flow Appendix C 4 Serial Handshaking Rev C IR 320 Technical Reference Manual The illustration below shows the final electrical connection With Jumper JP32 on the POS Board SHORTED Device Settings When Software Requires RTS CTS Handshaking To set RTS CTS handshaking check that the IR 320 and
301. y UZ 11 peo a a e O Ia EPSONKB MAP mf lt a Input the file name for load save or edit The file command defines a key definition file name for Load and Save operations This file name must use MS DOS file name format 8 character name 3 character extension You can edit the file name with Backspace Delete and arrow keys Press Enter to confirm the file name or ESC to cancel When you exit this utility the file name defined by the File command is saved in the KBD_DL CFG file When the utility is booted up next the name of the file containing the key definition data is read from KBD_DL CFG Load Command When you select the Load command the following screen is displayed Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 Load keyboard map file Press Enter to read the key definition data from the file created by the File command Save Command When you select the Load command the following screen is displayed Rev C Utilities 4 63 Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 Press Enter to save the key definition data to the file created by the File command Edit Command When you select Edit the following screen is displayed Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 Edit keyboard map Press Enter to switch to the screen below Epson POS Keyboard Utility UZ 11 ee ise a ef aaa sel sl el Sal E aa sel sn e E E aaa all lle fie aca all sen el E pa fect feat fea es es es es aaa clas Es peor ppt Jee feel
302. ye pate A AA a Meee te 7 5 Memory 1684pin DIMM iresi t ri be a A AS eee ald asin arog bet 7 5 Video Controller ete GH PSN STE cca LEME cs Gol be ara Be Rata uae ends trata 7 5 TIENDA Ra RA a Rote 7 5 Serial Device ete ete rey tate SA A Sane te et ea E 7 6 PGI SOUS a e tee beatae A te ete ut etn or tad Hts OS DN a Game A 7 6 Three terminal regulators for the drawer 66 e eens 7 6 Ethernet Controller ici ca ete ng A BEERS AA 7 6 Power Supply Unit wig os od shanks val id hawaii te teks ohh Siete oe we ae si 7 7 Lithium Battery A A A Paes es 7 8 Interface ioe o Aa arate asin MRA a oc ia nds Methane Hen AAT pea chek ate ah tana aad 7 9 Serial Connectors ri da Ga aA A hae DE RAE A A ad 7 9 Parallel Connector LPT Connector 2 2 0 0 eee c cee rr 7 10 External TM Power Connector 0 0c ccc nett teen renren renner ern 7 10 DKD Connector A PRG a Aa ewe PS 7 11 Customer Display Connector 0666 nnn enn een nee 7 12 Appendix A Wake On LAN OVERVIEW eroas re Aen deri nee PEN hae HA AU Ripa Ewa EE AS A a RO ES OE EA hae i A 1 Objective of Wake On LAN nigata moi asta ho BEA eek AER le a A 1 Settings for Using Wake On LAN 6 rr A 1 Wake On EAN Methods iria A A A tios aci A 1 Basic Operation Soi fh be Sb AA Ae as eta eit eRe EA Seated A 2 Software Settings 22S a ees ha wet eka testis sabes ya A 2 BIOS Setas hese cists boas Saar de Re aad ae ee eae E at ds Tas A 2 Wake On LAN Method Details 0 0 00 cee en
303. ystem standby After 10 mins After 15 mins After 20 mins After 25 mins After 30 mins After 45 mins After 1 hour After 2 hours After 3 hours After 4 hours After 5 hours System hibernates When there is no HDD access for the time set the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops Windows 2000 Professional 1 Select Settings Control Panel Power Options in the Start menu of Windows 2 Power Options Properties is displayed Click the Power Schemes tab 3 66 OS and Drivers Power Options Properties 21x Power Schemes Advanced Hibemate UPS this computer Note that changing the settings below will modify va Select the power scheme with the most appropriate settings for the selected scheme gt Power schemes Home Office Desk Save As Delete r Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off hard disks Never y System standby Never X Turn off monitor ater 20 mins y Rev C IR 320 Series Technical Reference Manual 3 Select the time in the Settings for Home Office Desk power scheme Turn off hard disks option Power Options Properties Home Office Desk 4 Click OK When there is no HDD access for the time set the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops Windows 98SE 1 Select Settings Control Panel Po

Confidential

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents